GENERAL DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

STATE COLLEGE BOROUGH MUNICIPAL BUILDING

GREEN ROOF

243 South Allen Street

State College, Pennsylvania

March 30, 2010

State College Borough Project # 13-2010

Project # 09-052 (HAAS)

HAAS BUILDING SOLUTIONS

Architecture Engineering Construction
1301 North Atherton Street
State College, Pennsylvania 16803
814-238-1551

Chilton Designs, LLC.

Consulting Engineers
615 Blue Spring Lane
Boalsburg, PA 16827
814-466-7030
SPECIFICATION INDEX Page #

Index i-1
Bid Proposal ii-1
Bid Bond iii-1
Non-collusion Affidavit iv-1
Performance Bond v-1
Labor & Material Bond vi-1
W-9 vii-1
Instructions to Bidders viii-1
AIA A201 - General Conditions ix-1
Supplemental General Conditions x-1
Prevailing Wage Determination xi-1

Division 1
011000 SUMMARY 011000-1
012300 ALTERNATES 012300-1
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500-1
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-1
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-1
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-1
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-1
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-1
014200 REFERENCES 014200-1
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-1
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-1
017300 EXECUTION 017300-1
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-1
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-1
Division 2
024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-1
Division 5
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1
Division 7
075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENNE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323-1
079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1
Division 8
085200 OUTSWING CASEMENT WINDOW 085200-1
Division 9
092900 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
099113 PAINTING 099113-1
Division 32
329500 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES 325900-1
329501 ALTERNATE #1 FOR CONVENTIONAL GREEN ROOF 329501-1

i-1
 BIDS DUE: 11:00 A.M., Tuesday, April 20 2010
Project No. 13-2010 (09-052)

BID PROPOSAL - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

Mr. Thomas J. Fountaine

State College Borough
243 South Allen Street
State College, Pennsylvania 16801

To Whom It May Concern:

This proposal is hereby submitted for the Green Roof Project, State College, Pennsylvania, as
described in the contract documents dated March 30, 2010, and prepared by Haas Building
Solutions Inc.

Having carefully examined all contract documents, and having visited the site and examined all the
conditions affecting the work, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, material,
appurtenances, equipment and services necessary and required to complete all the work described
in the aforementioned contract documents, for the base sum of:

($ )

If awarded this contract we will commence the work on and we will complete the
work as per the contract documents prior to August 20, 2010.

The following subcontractors shall perform the work for the major divisions of the construction
work as listed below:

1. Plumbing ...........................................................................

2. Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning ............................

3. Electrical ............................................................................

4. Fire Protection………………………………………………...

5. Structural steel....................................................................

6. Roofing...............................................................................

7. Green Roof (Base bid)........................................................

If Alternate No. 1 (Section 329501) is acceptable to the Owner, add/deduct the sum of:

($ ) to the above base sum.

ii - 1
The following Green Roof manufacturer is being utilized for the bid:

1. Base Bid - Green Roof manufacturer...............................

Receipt of the following Addenda to the Contract Documents is acknowledged:

Addendum No. dated .

Addendum No. dated .
Addendum No. dated .
Addendum No. dated .

Quotation by:

_______________________________ ______________________________
Name of Company Signature

_______________________________ ______________________________
Address Title

_______________________________ ______________________________
Telephone Number Date

ii - 2
iii-1
iv-1
v-1
v-2
 LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

BOND NUMBER __________________

KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:

That we _______________________________________________________________________ as
Principal, and , a corporation
organized and existing under the laws of the State of , as Surety, are held and firmly
bound unto the Borough of State College, Centre County , PA, as Obligee, hereinafter called the "Borough," in
the full and just sum of Dollars
($ ), lawful money of the United States of America, to be paid to the said
Borough of State College, Centre County, PA, or its assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made and
done we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.

SIGNED, SEALED and DATED THIS day of , A.D.,20 . WHEREAS, the

above bounden Principal has entered into a contract with the said Borough dated the day of
, A.D., 20 , for the construction of
upon certain terms and conditions in said contract more
particularly mentioned;

AND WHEREAS, it is one of the conditions of the award of the Borough pursuant to which said contract is
about to be entered into that these presents be executed.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that, if the above bounden
Principal shall and will promptly pay or cause to be paid all sums of money which may be due any person, co-
partnership, association or corporation for all materials furnished and labor supplied or performed in the
prosecution of the work, whether or not the said material or labor entered into and become component parts of
the work or improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force
and effect.

The Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Borough herein that every person,
co-person, co-partnership, association or corporation who, whether as subcontractor or otherwise, has
furnished material or supplied or performed labor in the prosecution of the work as above provided and who
has not paid therefore, may sue in assumption on this bond in the name of the Borough for their or its use and
prosecute the same to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due them or it and have
execution hereon; provided however, that the Borough shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or
expenses of any such suit.

Recovery by any person, co-partnership, association or corporation hereunder shall be subject to the
provisions of the Act of General Assembly No.294, approved June 22, 1931, P.L. 881, to the same extent as if
the same provisions were fully incorporated in this bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have duly executed this bond under seal the
day and year above written.

_________________________
(Name of Principal)

Attest: BY
President
_____________________________________

11
 Secretary
(Affix Corporate Seal)

Witness: ____________________________________
(Name of Surety)

as to Surety BY ______________________________
Attorney-in-Fact

NOTES:

1. This bond, if executed by any person other than the President or Vice-President of either company
above, must be accompanied by a certificate of even date showing authority conferred upon the
person so signing to execute such instruments on behalf of the company represented.

2. A financial statement of the Surety Company must be attached to this bond.

12
Form
(Rev. October 2007)
W-9 Request for Taxpayer Give form to the
requester. Do not
Department of the Treasury
Identification Number and Certification send to the IRS.
Internal Revenue Service
Name (as shown on your income tax return)
See Specific Instructions on page 2.

Business name, if different from above

Print or type

Check appropriate box: Individual/Sole proprietor Corporation Partnership

Exempt
Limited liability company. Enter the tax classification (D=disregarded entity, C=corporation, P=partnership) ©
payee
Other (see instructions) ©

Address (number, street, and apt. or suite no.) Requester’s name and address (optional)

City, state, and ZIP code

List account number(s) here (optional)

Part I Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN)

Enter your TIN in the appropriate box. The TIN provided must match the name given on Line 1 to avoid Social security number
backup withholding. For individuals, this is your social security number (SSN). However, for a resident
alien, sole proprietor, or disregarded entity, see the Part I instructions on page 3. For other entities, it is
your employer identification number (EIN). If you do not have a number, see How to get a TIN on page 3. or
Note. If the account is in more than one name, see the chart on page 4 for guidelines on whose Employer identification number
number to enter.
Part II Certification
Under penalties of perjury, I certify that:
1. The number shown on this form is my correct taxpayer identification number (or I am waiting for a number to be issued to me), and
2. I am not subject to backup withholding because: (a) I am exempt from backup withholding, or (b) I have not been notified by the Internal
Revenue Service (IRS) that I am subject to backup withholding as a result of a failure to report all interest or dividends, or (c) the IRS has
notified me that I am no longer subject to backup withholding, and
3. I am a U.S. citizen or other U.S. person (defined below).
Certification instructions. You must cross out item 2 above if you have been notified by the IRS that you are currently subject to backup
withholding because you have failed to report all interest and dividends on your tax return. For real estate transactions, item 2 does not apply.
For mortgage interest paid, acquisition or abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, contributions to an individual retirement
arrangement (IRA), and generally, payments other than interest and dividends, you are not required to sign the Certification, but you must
provide your correct TIN. See the instructions on page 4.

Sign Signature of
Here U.S. person © Date ©

General Instructions Definition of a U.S. person. For federal tax purposes, you are
considered a U.S. person if you are:
Section references are to the Internal Revenue Code unless
otherwise noted. ● An individual who is a U.S. citizen or U.S. resident alien,
● A partnership, corporation, company, or association created or
Purpose of Form organized in the United States or under the laws of the United
A person who is required to file an information return with the States,
IRS must obtain your correct taxpayer identification number (TIN) ● An estate (other than a foreign estate), or
to report, for example, income paid to you, real estate ● A domestic trust (as defined in Regulations section
transactions, mortgage interest you paid, acquisition or 301.7701-7).
abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, or
Special rules for partnerships. Partnerships that conduct a
contributions you made to an IRA.
trade or business in the United States are generally required to
Use Form W-9 only if you are a U.S. person (including a pay a withholding tax on any foreign partners’ share of income
resident alien), to provide your correct TIN to the person from such business. Further, in certain cases where a Form W-9
requesting it (the requester) and, when applicable, to: has not been received, a partnership is required to presume that
1. Certify that the TIN you are giving is correct (or you are a partner is a foreign person, and pay the withholding tax.
waiting for a number to be issued), Therefore, if you are a U.S. person that is a partner in a
partnership conducting a trade or business in the United States,
2. Certify that you are not subject to backup withholding, or provide Form W-9 to the partnership to establish your U.S.
3. Claim exemption from backup withholding if you are a U.S. status and avoid withholding on your share of partnership
exempt payee. If applicable, you are also certifying that as a income.
U.S. person, your allocable share of any partnership income from The person who gives Form W-9 to the partnership for
a U.S. trade or business is not subject to the withholding tax on purposes of establishing its U.S. status and avoiding withholding
foreign partners’ share of effectively connected income. on its allocable share of net income from the partnership
Note. If a requester gives you a form other than Form W-9 to conducting a trade or business in the United States is in the
request your TIN, you must use the requester’s form if it is following cases:
substantially similar to this Form W-9.
● The U.S. owner of a disregarded entity and not the entity,
Cat. No. 10231X Form W-9 (Rev. 10-2007)
vii-1
Form W-9 (Rev. 10-2007)
● The U.S. grantor or other owner of a grantor trust and not the
trust, and
● The U.S. trust (other than a grantor trust) and not the
beneficiaries of the trust.
Foreign person. If you are a foreign person, do not use Form
W-9. Instead, use the appropriate Form W-8 (see Publication
515, Withholding of Tax on Nonresident Aliens and Foreign
Entities).
Nonresident alien who becomes a resident alien. Generally,
only a nonresident alien individual may use the terms of a tax
treaty to reduce or eliminate U.S. tax on certain types of income.
However, most tax treaties contain a provision known as a
“saving clause.” Exceptions specified in the saving clause may
permit an exemption from tax to continue for certain types of
income even after the payee has otherwise become a U.S.
resident alien for tax purposes.
If you are a U.S. resident alien who is relying on an exception
contained in the saving clause of a tax treaty to claim an
exemption from U.S. tax on certain types of income, you must
attach a statement to Form W-9 that specifies the following five
items:
1. The treaty country. Generally, this must be the same treaty
under which you claimed exemption from tax as a nonresident
alien.
2. The treaty article addressing the income.
3. The article number (or location) in the tax treaty that
contains the saving clause and its exceptions.
4. The type and amount of income that qualifies for the
exemption from tax.
5. Sufficient facts to justify the exemption from tax under the
terms of the treaty article.
Example. Article 20 of the U.S.-China income tax treaty allows
an exemption from tax for scholarship income received by a
Chinese student temporarily present in the United States. Under
U.S. law, this student will become a resident alien for tax
purposes if his or her stay in the United States exceeds 5
calendar years. However, paragraph 2 of the first Protocol to the
U.S.-China treaty (dated April 30, 1984) allows the provisions of
Article 20 to continue to apply even after the Chinese student
becomes a resident alien of the United States. A Chinese
student who qualifies for this exception (under paragraph 2 of
the first protocol) and is relying on this exception to claim an
exemption from tax on his or her scholarship or fellowship
income would attach to Form W-9 a statement that includes the
information described above to support that exemption.
If you are a nonresident alien or a foreign entity not subject to
backup withholding, give the requester the appropriate
completed Form W-8.
What is backup withholding? Persons making certain payments
to you must under certain conditions withhold and pay to the
IRS 28% of such payments. This is called “backup withholding.”
Payments that may be subject to backup withholding include
interest, tax-exempt interest, dividends, broker and barter
exchange transactions, rents, royalties, nonemployee pay, and
certain payments from fishing boat operators. Real estate
transactions are not subject to backup withholding.
You will not be subject to backup withholding on payments
you receive if you give the requester your correct TIN, make the
proper certifications, and report all your taxable interest and
dividends on your tax return.
Payments you receive will be subject to backup
withholding if:
1. You do not furnish your TIN to the requester,
2. You do not certify your TIN when required (see the Part II
instructions on page 3 for details),
3. The IRS tells the requester that you furnished an incorrect
TIN,
vii-2
Page 2
4. The IRS tells you that you are subject to backup
withholding because you did not report all your interest and
dividends on your tax return (for reportable interest and
dividends only), or
5. You do not certify to the requester that you are not subject
to backup withholding under 4 above (for reportable interest and
dividend accounts opened after 1983 only).
Certain payees and payments are exempt from backup
withholding. See the instructions below and the separate
Instructions for the Requester of Form W-9.
Also see Special rules for partnerships on page 1.
Penalties
Failure to furnish TIN. If you fail to furnish your correct TIN to a
requester, you are subject to a penalty of $50 for each such
failure unless your failure is due to reasonable cause and not to
willful neglect.
Civil penalty for false information with respect to
withholding. If you make a false statement with no reasonable
basis that results in no backup withholding, you are subject to a
$500 penalty.
Criminal penalty for falsifying information. Willfully falsifying
certifications or affirmations may subject you to criminal
penalties including fines and/or imprisonment.
Misuse of TINs. If the requester discloses or uses TINs in
violation of federal law, the requester may be subject to civil and
criminal penalties.
Specific Instructions
Name
If you are an individual, you must generally enter the name
shown on your income tax return. However, if you have changed
your last name, for instance, due to marriage without informing
the Social Security Administration of the name change, enter
your first name, the last name shown on your social security
card, and your new last name.
If the account is in joint names, list first, and then circle, the
name of the person or entity whose number you entered in Part I
of the form.
Sole proprietor. Enter your individual name as shown on your
income tax return on the “Name” line. You may enter your
business, trade, or “doing business as (DBA)” name on the
“Business name” line.
Limited liability company (LLC). Check the “Limited liability
company” box only and enter the appropriate code for the tax
classification (“D” for disregarded entity, “C” for corporation, “P”
for partnership) in the space provided.
For a single-member LLC (including a foreign LLC with a
domestic owner) that is disregarded as an entity separate from
its owner under Regulations section 301.7701-3, enter the
owner’s name on the “Name” line. Enter the LLC’s name on the
“Business name” line.
For an LLC classified as a partnership or a corporation, enter
the LLC’s name on the “Name” line and any business, trade, or
DBA name on the “Business name” line.
Other entities. Enter your business name as shown on required
federal tax documents on the “Name” line. This name should
match the name shown on the charter or other legal document
creating the entity. You may enter any business, trade, or DBA
name on the “Business name” line.
Note. You are requested to check the appropriate box for your
status (individual/sole proprietor, corporation, etc.).
Exempt Payee
If you are exempt from backup withholding, enter your name as
described above and check the appropriate box for your status,
then check the “Exempt payee” box in the line following the
business name, sign and date the form.
Form W-9 (Rev. 10-2007) Page 3
Generally, individuals (including sole proprietors) are not exempt Part I. Taxpayer Identification
from backup withholding. Corporations are exempt from backup
withholding for certain payments, such as interest and dividends. Number (TIN)
Note. If you are exempt from backup withholding, you should Enter your TIN in the appropriate box. If you are a resident
still complete this form to avoid possible erroneous backup alien and you do not have and are not eligible to get an SSN,
withholding. your TIN is your IRS individual taxpayer identification number
The following payees are exempt from backup withholding: (ITIN). Enter it in the social security number box. If you do not
have an ITIN, see How to get a TIN below.
1. An organization exempt from tax under section 501(a), any
IRA, or a custodial account under section 403(b)(7) if the account If you are a sole proprietor and you have an EIN, you may
satisfies the requirements of section 401(f)(2), enter either your SSN or EIN. However, the IRS prefers that you
use your SSN.
2. The United States or any of its agencies or If you are a single-member LLC that is disregarded as an
instrumentalities, entity separate from its owner (see Limited liability company
3. A state, the District of Columbia, a possession of the United (LLC) on page 2), enter the owner’s SSN (or EIN, if the owner
States, or any of their political subdivisions or instrumentalities, has one). Do not enter the disregarded entity’s EIN. If the LLC is
4. A foreign government or any of its political subdivisions, classified as a corporation or partnership, enter the entity’s EIN.
agencies, or instrumentalities, or Note. See the chart on page 4 for further clarification of name
5. An international organization or any of its agencies or and TIN combinations.
instrumentalities. How to get a TIN. If you do not have a TIN, apply for one
immediately. To apply for an SSN, get Form SS-5, Application
Other payees that may be exempt from backup withholding for a Social Security Card, from your local Social Security
include: Administration office or get this form online at www.ssa.gov. You
6. A corporation, may also get this form by calling 1-800-772-1213. Use Form
7. A foreign central bank of issue, W-7, Application for IRS Individual Taxpayer Identification
8. A dealer in securities or commodities required to register in Number, to apply for an ITIN, or Form SS-4, Application for
the United States, the District of Columbia, or a possession of Employer Identification Number, to apply for an EIN. You can
the United States, apply for an EIN online by accessing the IRS website at
www.irs.gov/businesses and clicking on Employer Identification
9. A futures commission merchant registered with the Number (EIN) under Starting a Business. You can get Forms W-7
Commodity Futures Trading Commission, and SS-4 from the IRS by visiting www.irs.gov or by calling
10. A real estate investment trust, 1-800-TAX-FORM (1-800-829-3676).
11. An entity registered at all times during the tax year under If you are asked to complete Form W-9 but do not have a TIN,
the Investment Company Act of 1940, write “Applied For” in the space for the TIN, sign and date the
form, and give it to the requester. For interest and dividend
12. A common trust fund operated by a bank under section payments, and certain payments made with respect to readily
584(a), tradable instruments, generally you will have 60 days to get a
13. A financial institution, TIN and give it to the requester before you are subject to backup
14. A middleman known in the investment community as a withholding on payments. The 60-day rule does not apply to
nominee or custodian, or other types of payments. You will be subject to backup
withholding on all such payments until you provide your TIN to
15. A trust exempt from tax under section 664 or described in the requester.
section 4947.
Note. Entering “Applied For” means that you have already
The chart below shows types of payments that may be applied for a TIN or that you intend to apply for one soon.
exempt from backup withholding. The chart applies to the Caution: A disregarded domestic entity that has a foreign owner
exempt payees listed above, 1 through 15. must use the appropriate Form W-8.
IF the payment is for . . . THEN the payment is exempt Part II. Certification
for . . .
To establish to the withholding agent that you are a U.S. person,
Interest and dividend payments All exempt payees except or resident alien, sign Form W-9. You may be requested to sign
for 9 by the withholding agent even if items 1, 4, and 5 below indicate
Broker transactions Exempt payees 1 through 13. otherwise.
Also, a person registered under For a joint account, only the person whose TIN is shown in
the Investment Advisers Act of Part I should sign (when required). Exempt payees, see Exempt
1940 who regularly acts as a Payee on page 2.
broker Signature requirements. Complete the certification as indicated
Barter exchange transactions Exempt payees 1 through 5 in 1 through 5 below.
and patronage dividends 1. Interest, dividend, and barter exchange accounts
opened before 1984 and broker accounts considered active
Payments over $600 required Generally, exempt
2
payees during 1983. You must give your correct TIN, but you do not
to be reported and direct 1 through 7 have to sign the certification.
1
sales over $5,000
2. Interest, dividend, broker, and barter exchange
1 accounts opened after 1983 and broker accounts considered
See Form 1099-MISC, Miscellaneous Income, and its instructions.
2 inactive during 1983. You must sign the certification or backup
However, the following payments made to a corporation (including gross
proceeds paid to an attorney under section 6045(f), even if the attorney is a
withholding will apply. If you are subject to backup withholding
corporation) and reportable on Form 1099-MISC are not exempt from and you are merely providing your correct TIN to the requester,
backup withholding: medical and health care payments, attorneys’ fees, and you must cross out item 2 in the certification before signing the
payments for services paid by a federal executive agency. form.

vii-3
Form W-9 (Rev. 10-2007) Page 4
3. Real estate transactions. You must sign the certification. Secure Your Tax Records from Identity Theft
You may cross out item 2 of the certification.
Identity theft occurs when someone uses your personal
4. Other payments. You must give your correct TIN, but you information such as your name, social security number (SSN), or
do not have to sign the certification unless you have been other identifying information, without your permission, to commit
notified that you have previously given an incorrect TIN. “Other fraud or other crimes. An identity thief may use your SSN to get
payments” include payments made in the course of the a job or may file a tax return using your SSN to receive a refund.
requester’s trade or business for rents, royalties, goods (other
than bills for merchandise), medical and health care services To reduce your risk:
(including payments to corporations), payments to a ● Protect your SSN,
nonemployee for services, payments to certain fishing boat crew ● Ensure your employer is protecting your SSN, and
members and fishermen, and gross proceeds paid to attorneys ● Be careful when choosing a tax preparer.
(including payments to corporations).
Call the IRS at 1-800-829-1040 if you think your identity has
5. Mortgage interest paid by you, acquisition or been used inappropriately for tax purposes.
abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt,
qualified tuition program payments (under section 529), IRA, Victims of identity theft who are experiencing economic harm
Coverdell ESA, Archer MSA or HSA contributions or or a system problem, or are seeking help in resolving tax
distributions, and pension distributions. You must give your problems that have not been resolved through normal channels,
correct TIN, but you do not have to sign the certification. may be eligible for Taxpayer Advocate Service (TAS) assistance.
You can reach TAS by calling the TAS toll-free case intake line
at 1-877-777-4778 or TTY/TDD 1-800-829-4059.
What Name and Number To Give the Requester
Protect yourself from suspicious emails or phishing
For this type of account: Give name and SSN of: schemes. Phishing is the creation and use of email and
websites designed to mimic legitimate business emails and
1. Individual The individual
websites. The most common act is sending an email to a user
2. Two or more individuals (joint The actual owner of the account or,
account) if combined funds, the first
falsely claiming to be an established legitimate enterprise in an
individual on the account
1
attempt to scam the user into surrendering private information
3. Custodian account of a minor The minor
2 that will be used for identity theft.
(Uniform Gift to Minors Act)
1
The IRS does not initiate contacts with taxpayers via emails.
4. a. The usual revocable savings The grantor-trustee Also, the IRS does not request personal detailed information
trust (grantor is also trustee) through email or ask taxpayers for the PIN numbers, passwords,
1
b. So-called trust account that is The actual owner or similar secret access information for their credit card, bank, or
not a legal or valid trust under other financial accounts.
state law
5. Sole proprietorship or disregarded The owner
3
If you receive an unsolicited email claiming to be from the IRS,
entity owned by an individual forward this message to phishing@irs.gov. You may also report
Give name and EIN of:
misuse of the IRS name, logo, or other IRS personal property to
For this type of account:
the Treasury Inspector General for Tax Administration at
6. Disregarded entity not owned by an The owner 1-800-366-4484. You can forward suspicious emails to the
individual Federal Trade Commission at: spam@uce.gov or contact them at
4
7. A valid trust, estate, or pension trust Legal entity www.consumer.gov/idtheft or 1-877-IDTHEFT(438-4338).
8. Corporate or LLC electing The corporation
corporate status on Form 8832 Visit the IRS website at www.irs.gov to learn more about
9. Association, club, religious, The organization identity theft and how to reduce your risk.
charitable, educational, or other
tax-exempt organization
10. Partnership or multi-member LLC The partnership
11. A broker or registered nominee The broker or nominee
12. Account with the Department of The public entity
Agriculture in the name of a public
entity (such as a state or local
government, school district, or
prison) that receives agricultural
program payments
1
List first and circle the name of the person whose number you furnish. If only one person
on a joint account has an SSN, that person’s number must be furnished.
2
Circle the minor’s name and furnish the minor’s SSN.
3
You must show your individual name and you may also enter your business or “DBA”
name on the second name line. You may use either your SSN or EIN (if you have one),
but the IRS encourages you to use your SSN.
4
List first and circle the name of the trust, estate, or pension trust. (Do not furnish the TIN
of the personal representative or trustee unless the legal entity itself is not designated in
the account title.) Also see Special rules for partnerships on page 1.

Note. If no name is circled when more than one name is listed,

the number will be considered to be that of the first name listed.

Privacy Act Notice

Section 6109 of the Internal Revenue Code requires you to provide your correct TIN to persons who must file information returns with the IRS to report interest,
dividends, and certain other income paid to you, mortgage interest you paid, the acquisition or abandonment of secured property, cancellation of debt, or
contributions you made to an IRA, or Archer MSA or HSA. The IRS uses the numbers for identification purposes and to help verify the accuracy of your tax return.
The IRS may also provide this information to the Department of Justice for civil and criminal litigation, and to cities, states, the District of Columbia, and U.S.
possessions to carry out their tax laws. We may also disclose this information to other countries under a tax treaty, to federal and state agencies to enforce federal
nontax criminal laws, or to federal law enforcement and intelligence agencies to combat terrorism.
You must provide your TIN whether or not you are required to file a tax return. Payers must generally withhold 28% of taxable interest, dividend, and certain other
payments to a payee who does not give a TIN to a payer. Certain penalties may also apply.

vii-4
 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. BIDS

The Borough of State College will receive and open sealed bids in the office of
the Borough Manager on April 20, 2010 at 11:00 a.m. for the following item(s):

PROJECT # 13-2010 Green Roof Project – This project consists of the

installation of a green roof, supporting steel, a new window, and associated finish
work.

Drawings and specifications for the above mentioned item(s) may be obtained at
the office of the Borough Manager. Deposit fee for the forms is $25, refundable
provided the bidder submits all forms including plans and non-bidders return all
forms and plans no later than the date of bid.

All bids are to be sealed and plainly marked on the outside, “BID ON PROJECT
# 13-2010”, addressed to the Borough Manager, Thomas J. Fountaine, 243
South Allen Street, State College, PA 16801 and be in his possession prior to
11:00 a.m. on April 20, 2010.

The Project is subject to Federal Prevailing Wages. See attached wage

determination. Each bid is to be accompanied by a non-collusion affidavit and a
certified check or bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the amount bid
and made payable to the Borough of State College. The successful bidder will be
required to provide a Payment and Performance Bond upon execution of the
contract.

A Pre-Bid Conference will be held in the State College Municipal Building, on

Tuesday, April 13, 2010, at 10:00 a.m. Interested parties should attend.

All bids will be presented to State College Borough Council at the Council
meeting to be at 7:30 p.m. on May 3, 2010. The Borough Council may then
accept or reject any or all bids or hold all bids for a period of sixty (60) days from
the date of Bid Opening before making a decision.

2. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

No oral explanations in regard to the meaning of the drawings and specifications

will be made, and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the
contract. Discrepancies, omissions, or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and
specifications should be communicated in writing to the Architect for
interpretation. Bidders should act promptly and allow sufficient time for a reply to
reach them before the submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be
in the form of a written addendum to the specifications which will be forwarded to
all bidders and its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged on the Bid Form.

viii-1
3. BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITY

Each bidder shall familiarize himself with all of the attached forms, instructions,
general conditions, supplementary general conditions, bulletins, addenda,
specifications and drawings. He will be held responsible for full compliance with
all documents. In submitting proposals for this work, each bidder will be held
responsible for having previously examined the existing premises and satisfied
himself as to the conditions under which he will be obliged to operate in
performing his part of the work, or that will in any manner affect the work under
the contract.

4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The drawings and these Specifications, whether taken separately or together, are
to be interpreted according to their full intent, meaning, and spirit, and shall be
deemed to explain mutually each other, and to be descriptive of the work to be
done under this contract. Should any discrepancy appear between the Specifi-
cations and the Drawings, such discrepancy shall be called to the attention of the
Architect for adjustment or decision prior to the submission of bids.

On the drawings, figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to scaled

dimensions, larger scale drawings shall be followed in preference to smaller
scale drawings, and descriptive indications in preference to the material code.
Should there be anything shown on the Drawings and not called for in the
Specifications, or vice versa, the same shall be carried out as if called for in
both. Should any error appear in the Drawings or Specifications, the error is to
be referred to the Architect for correction before the bids are submitted, or if not
discovered previously, then before the work is proceeded with. The Contractor
shall not make any alterations or corrections to the Contract Documents without
consulting the Architect beforehand.

5. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Upon award of contract, the successful Contractor shall furnish the Architect with
a breakdown of costs or schedule of values, based upon mutual agreement
between the contractor and the Architect, concerning divisions of the work and
methods of payment.

6. AGREEMENT

The AIA Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (AIA
Document A-201) shall be the form of agreement. This agreement and insurance
certificates shall be executed in triplicate. The contract will be assigned to the
Architect for enforcement and oversight.

7. GENERAL

The Owner agrees to include the interest of the successful bidders in a standard
fire and extended coverage insurance policy in accordance with "General
Conditions."

viii-2
 The Contractor shall submit a list of all subcontractors and materials for approval
to the Architect and no contract shall be entered into with any subcontractor
before his name has been approved in writing. The Contractor shall submit
proper evidence of orders for material and these contracts shall be entered into
early to allow for such items for the work to be properly expedited and within the
time for completion of the job.

Where the terms "Each Contractor," "Each Prime Contractor," "Plumbing

Contractor," "Electrical Contractor," or "Heating and Ventilating Contractor"
appear throughout the Contract Documents, they shall be construed to mean and
be synonymous with the Individual Prime Bidder as referenced.

8. PAYMENT OF TAXES

The Contractor under this Contract will be responsible for payment of all
applicable taxes, including Pennsylvania State Sales Taxes, and shall include
allowance for such taxes in his proposal. No additional payment will be made to
cover taxes; all costs associated with payment of taxes shall be included in the
prices of the proposal.

9. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS

The Contractor Manager will obtain the building permit, plumbing permit,
electrical permit, sewer authority permit, water authority permit and any other
permits as required for the construction of the project. All costs relating to such
permits shall not be included in the proposal of each bidder.

10. PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE

Payments shall be made on the basis of 90% of the approved monthly schedule
of work performed.

11. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT

The successful Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the
Contract and bonds and furnish evidence of required insurance coverage within
fourteen (14) days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his proposal,
shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the
security deposited with his proposal.

12. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time allowed will result
in damages being sustained by the Borough. Unless otherwise provided in
Special Provisions, the Borough may deduct the sum of two-hundred dollars
($200.00) from monies due the contractor for each day of delay in finishing the
work in excess of the time specified for completion, plus any authorized time
extensions. Should the total amount of damages exceed the monies due the
contractor, then such excesses shall be paid to the Borough by the Contractor.

viii-3
 Execution of the contract under these specifications shall constitute agreement
by the Borough and Contractor (1) that two-hundred dollars ($200.00) per day is
the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by failure of the
contractor to complete the work within the allotted time, (2) that such sum is liqui-
dated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty and (3) that liquidated
damages shall be compensation to the Borough for direct losses or increased
maintenance costs due to delay in completion only, and does not relieve the
Contractor of any other recoverable damages as the law may provide.

13. SIGNATURES

The bid proposal and subsequent contract shall be signed by a principal

or officer of the Company. Any other signature must be accompanied by
a Resolution from the Company authorizing the signature as legal and
binding.

14. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

The Contractor shall, at the pre-construction meeting, submit to the Borough

Engineer, for his approval, a detailed construction schedule showing completion
of all work on or before the time allowed by the contract. The schedule shall be
in chart form of suitable scale to indicate the percentage of work scheduled for
completion at any time. The progress schedule is to serve as a guide to both the
Contractor and the Borough for the phasing of the project.

During construction, the construction schedule will be reviewed regularly by the

Borough Engineer to compare actual work complete with the amount of work
scheduled to be complete. If it is determined that the Contractor is behind
schedule, the Borough Engineer will request a revised schedule to show how the
remainder of the Project will be completed by the contract completion date. The
revised schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor within seven (7) days of
the Borough Engineer's request.

15. DEFECTIVE WORK

When any material not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications and
Drawings has been delivered upon the Site of the Project or incorporated in the
work, or when any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work
shall be considered as defective and shall be immediately removed and renewed
or made satisfactory as required by the Engineer. Failure or neglect on the part
of the Engineer to condemn or reject any bad or inferior work or materials shall
not be so construed as to imply an acceptance of such work or materials, if such
bad or inferior materials or work becomes evident at any time prior to the delivery
of the final payment by the Owner to the Contractor; nor shall it be construed as
barring the Owner at any subsequent time from the recovery of damages in such
sum of money as may be needed to build anew all or portions of the work in
which fraud where practiced or improper materials hidden, whenever found.

The Contractor shall remove at his own expense any work or material
condemned, and shall rebuild and replace the same without extra charge, or in
case the Engineer should not consider the defect of sufficient importance to

viii-4
 require the Contractor to rebuild or replace any imperfect work or material, he
shall have the power and is hereby authorized to make an equitable deduction
from the stipulated price.

The Contractor shall promptly move from the premises all materials condemned
by the Engineer as failing to conform to the Contract or Specifications, whether
incorporated in the structure or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace his
own work in accordance with the Contract and without expense to the Owner,
and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors
destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does
not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed
by written notice from Owner or Engineer or if materials previously condemned
and removed from the Site of the work are subsequently found at the same or
other site of work, the Owner may remove them and may store the material at the
expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expenses of such
removal within ten (10) days thereafter, the Owner may, upon ten (10) days'
written notice, deduct all the costs and expenses of such removal from any
monies that may be due the Contractor.

If any material intended for use in the construction of this Project, has been
inspected and rejected after such material has been delivered to the site, all such
rejected material shall be immediately removed from the job site by the
contractor.

16. STORAGE & USE OF LANDS

Materials shall be stored so as to insure preservation of their specified quality

and fitness for the work. When considered necessary they shall be placed on
wooden platforms or other hard and clean surfaces, and not on the ground, and
shall be placed under cover when directed. Stored materials shall be located so
as to facilitate prompt inspection.

Private property shall not be used for construction or storage purposes without
written permission of the owner or lessee of the property. Should the Contractor
require additional area other than public rights-of-way, easements, etc. to
complete the project, it shall be his responsibility to obtain said written
permission.

17. EMPLOYEE DISCRIMINATION

The Contractor shall understand and agree to the following:

(a) That, in the hiring of employees for the performance of work

hereunder, no contractor, subcontractor, nor any person acting on behalf
of such contractor, nor any person acting on behalf of such contractor or
subcontractor, shall for reason of actual or perceived race, color, familial
status, religion, ancestry, age, sex, national origin, the use of a guide or
support animals and/or mechanical aids, sexual orientation, gender
identity or expression, marital status, mental or physical disability, source
of income, discriminate against any individual who is qualified and
available to perform the work to which the employment relates;

viii-5
 Covered employers shall comply with the provisions of the Americans
with Disabilities Act of 1990 with respect to removing barriers which
prevent qualified individuals with disabilities from enjoying the same
employment opportunities that are available to persons without
disabilities, including the requirement to consider whether reasonable
accommodations will remove a barrier to the employment of an individual
with disabilities.

The Contractor is responsible for and agrees to indemnify and hold

harmless the Borough of State College from all losses, damages,
expenses, claims, demands, suits, and actions brought by any party
against the Borough of State College as a result of the Contractor's failure
to comply with the above provisions.

(b) That no contractor, subcontractor, nor any person on his behalf, shall,
in any manner, discriminate against or intimidate any employee hired for
the performance of work on account of reason of actual or perceived
race, color, familial status, religion, ancestry, age, sex, national origin, the
use of a guide or support animals and/or mechanical aids, sexual
orientation, gender identity or expression, marital status, mental or
physical disability, source of income, discriminate against any individual
who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the
employment relates;

(c) That there may be deducted, from the amount payable to the
contractor a penalty of five dollars ($5.00) for each person for each
calendar day during which such person was discriminated against or
intimidated in violation of these provisions, and

(d) That the contract may be canceled or terminated by the Borough and
all money due, or to become due hereunder may be forfeited for a second
or any subsequent violation of the terms or conditions of this portion of
the contract.

(e) Notwithstanding the above provisions, the parties hereto agree to be

bound by and comply with all the existing statutory requirements
pertaining to Borough contracts and when the existing statutory
requirements are at variance with the above provisions, the statutory
requirements shall prevail the same as though incorporated herein.

18. PROPERTY DAMAGE

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to all
abutting public and private property and shall be held responsible for all damage
done to existing pavement, manholes, inlets, curbs, sidewalks, trees, shrubs and
private lawn or any other public or private property. The Contractor shall rectify,
at his own expense, any damage or injury to public or private property, whether
within or outside of the Project limits by making prompt restitution for or
repair/restoration of such damages or injury at the Borough Engineer's discretion.

viii-6
19. DUST CONTROL

Provide effective dust control by sprinkling water, use of calcium chloride or any
other method approved by the Engineer. Employ dust control when, where and
in a manner required by the Engineer.

20. PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

The Contractor shall provide one set of either photographs or video-tapes of the
Pre-Construction conditions. This requirement may be waived, but only after
written request to and authorization from the Borough Engineer.

21. DISPOSAL OF RECYCLABLE MATERIAL

If applicable to this project, the contractor may dispose of recyclable materials at

the Glenn O. Hawbaker Recycle Center at 2145 North Atherton Street. However,
please note, tracking of disposal of materials will be required.

viii-7
 AIA Document A201 – 1997
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

for the following PROJECT:

(Name and location or address):
State College Borough Project # 13-2010
State College Borough Municipal Building Green Roof
243 South Allen Street, State College, PA 16801

THE OWNER:
(Name and address):
State College Borough
243 South Allen Street
State College, PA 16801

THE ARCHITECT:
(Name and address):
Haas Building Solutions Inc.
1301 North Atherton Street
State College, Pennsylvania 16803

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

ix-1
INDEX Architect's Authority to Reject Work
(Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect's Copyright
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 1.6
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Architect's Decisions
Acceptance of Work 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5,
9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4,
Access to Work 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Architect's Inspections
Accident Prevention 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
4.2.3, 10 Architect's Instructions
Acts and Omissions 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.8, 7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, Architect's Interpretations
9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6
Addenda Architect's Project Representative
1.1.1, 3.11 4.2.10
Additional Costs, Claims for Architect's Relationship with Contractor
4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1, 10.3 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1,
Additional Inspections and Testing 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2,
9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4,
Additional Time, Claims for 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12,
4.3.4, 4.3.7, 8.3.2 13.4.2, 13.5
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors
3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.4.7
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Representations
1.1.1 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Aesthetic Effect Architect's Site Visits
4.2.13, 4.5.1 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,
Allowances 13.5
3.8 Asbestos
All-risk Insurance 10.3.1
11.4.1.1 Attorneys' Fees
Applications for Payment 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3
4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, Award of Separate Contracts
9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 6.1.1, 6.1.2
Approvals Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Portions of the Work
Arbitration 5.2
4.3.3, 4.4, 4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1, 11.4.9, Basic Definitions
11.4.10 1.1
Architect Bidding Requirements
4.1 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.5.1
Architect, Definition of Boiler and Machinery Insurance
4.1.1 11.4.2
Architect, Extent of Authority Bonds, Lien
2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.10.2
9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, Bonds, Performance, and Payment
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
Architect, Limitations of Authority and Building Permit
Responsibility 3.7.1
2.1.1, 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, Capitalization
4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4, 1.3
5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Certificate of Substantial Completion
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5
2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Certificates for Payment
Architect's Administration of the Contract 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1,
3.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4, 9.4, 9.5 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Architect's Approvals Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval
2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
9.10.2, 11.1.3 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
Change Orders 1.1.4, 6
1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.4, Construction Change Directive, Definition of
4.3.9, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 7.3.1
11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 Construction Change Directives
Change Orders, Definition of 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.9, 7.1, 7.3, 9.3.1.1
7.2.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's
CHANGES IN THE WORK 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3
3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
Claim, Definition of 5.4, 14.2.2.2
4.3.1 Continuing Contract Performance
Claims and Disputes 4.3.3
3.2.3, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.8, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, Contract, Definition of
10.3.3 1.1.2
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
4.6.5 SUSPENSION OF THE
Claims for Additional Cost 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14
3.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1, 7.3.8, 10.3.2 Contract Administration
Claims for Additional Time 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5
3.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions to
4.3.4 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1
Claims for Damages Contract Documents, The
3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 1.1, 1.2
11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of
Claims Subject to Arbitration 1.6, 2.2.5, 5.3
4.4.1, 4.5.1, 4.6.1 Contract Documents, Definition of
Cleaning Up 1.1.1
3.15, 6.3 Contract Sum
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 3.8, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2,
13.7 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2
Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to Contract Sum, Definition of
2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 9.1
5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, Contract Time
11.5.1 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2,
Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2
8.1.2 Contract Time, Definition of
Communications Facilitating Contract 8.1.1
Administration CONTRACTOR
3.9.1, 4.2.4 3
Completion, Conditions Relating to Contractor, Definition of
1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 3.1, 6.1.2
9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 Contractor's Construction Schedules
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3
9 Contractor's Employees
Completion, Substantial 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1,
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 Contractor's Liability Insurance
Compliance with Laws 11.1
1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6.4, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors
4.6.6, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, and Owner's Forces
13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Concealed or Unknown Conditions Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors
4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
Conditions of the Contract 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8
1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect
Consent, Written 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1,
1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2,
9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4,
9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 8.1.4
13.4.2, 13.5 Decisions of the Architect
Contractor's Representations 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5,
1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4,
Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Work Decisions to Withhold Certification
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3
10 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Rejection and Correction of
1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2,
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
9.7 Defective Work, Definition of
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 3.5.1
4.3.10, 14.1 Definitions
Contractor's Submittals 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Delays and Extensions of Time
Contractor's Superintendent 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,
3.9, 10.2.6 7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
Contractor's Supervision and Construction Disputes
Procedures 4.1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.3, 7.3.8
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, Documents and Samples at the Site
6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 3.11
Contractual Liability Insurance Drawings, Definition of
11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 1.1.5
Coordination and Correlation Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of
1.2, 1.5.2, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 1.1.1, 1.3, 2.2.5, 3.11, 5.3
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Effective Date of Insurance
1.6, 2.2.5, 3.11 8.2.2, 11.1.2
Copyrights Emergencies
1.6, 3.17 4.3.5, 10.6, 14.1.1.2
Correction of Work Employees, Contractor's
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
12.2, 13.7.1.3 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Equipment, Labor, Materials and
1.2 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
Cost, Definition of 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
7.3.6 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
Costs Execution and Progress of the Work
2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 3.10, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4,
11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 8.2, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3
Cutting and Patching Extensions of Time
6.2.5, 3.14 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1,
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
Contractors Failure of Payment
3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6
11.4, 12.2.4 Faulty Work
Damage to the Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 Final Completion and Final Payment
Damages, Claims for 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1,
3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Financial Arrangements, Owner's
Damages for Delay 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5
6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 11.4
8.1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 1
8.1.3 Governing Law
Day, Definition of 13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty) Labor and Materials, Equipment
Hazardous Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 42.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
Identification of Contract Documents 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
1.5.1 Labor Disputes
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 8.3.1
5.2.1 Laws and Regulations
Indemnification 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6,
3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
Information and Services Required of the Owner 13.5.2, 13.6, 14
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, Liens
6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 2.1.2, 4.4.8, 8.2.2, 9.3.3, 9.10
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder
Injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.6.4
4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 Limitations, Statutes of
Inspections 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, Limitations of Liability
9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18,
Instructions to Bidders 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4,
1.1.1 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Time
3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12, 8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
Insurance 4.2.7, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4,
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9,
9.10.5, 11 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 13.7, 14
11.4.2 Loss of Use Insurance
Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.4.3
11.1 Material Suppliers
Insurance, Effective Date of 1.6, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5
8.2.2, 11.1.2 Materials, Hazardous
Insurance, Loss of Use 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5
11.4.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and
Insurance, Owner's Liability 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13,
11.2 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3,
Insurance, Project Management Protective 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
Liability Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
11.3 Procedures of Construction
Insurance, Property 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2
10.2.5, 11.4 Mechanic's Lien
Insurance, Stored Materials 4.4.8
9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 Mediation
INSURANCE AND BONDS 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8, 4.5, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5
11 Minor Changes in the Work
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.6, 7.1, 7.4
9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Insurance Companies, Settlement with 13
11.4.10 Modifications, Definition of
Intent of the Contract Documents 1.1.1
1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Modifications to the Contract
Interest 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1,
13.6 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1
Interpretation Mutual Responsibility
1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 6.2
Interpretations, Written Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of
4.6.4 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4,
Judgment on Final Award 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
4.6.6 Notice
2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.9, 4.3, Patching, Cutting and
4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 3.14, 6.2.5
11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 Patents
Notice, Written 3.17
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, Payment, Applications for
5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5,
12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment, Certificates for
13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1,
Notice to Proceed 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
8.2.2 Payment, Failure of
Notices, Permits, Fees and 4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6
2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Payment, Final
Observations, Contractor's 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1,
1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 4.3.4 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Occupancy Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.4.1.5 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
Orders, Written Payments, Progress
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3
13.5.2, 14.3.1 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
OWNER 9
2 Payments to Subcontractors
Owner, Definition of 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 11.4.8,
2.1 14.2.1.2
Owner, Information and Services Required of the PCB
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 10.3.1
6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, Performance Bond and Payment Bond
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
Owner's Authority Permits, Fees and Notices
1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2
4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, OF
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 10
12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4
Owner's Financial Capability Polychlorinated Biphenyl
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 10.3.1
Owner's Liability Insurance Product Data, Definition of
11.2 3.12.2
Owner's Loss of Use Insurance Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
11.4.3 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors Progress and Completion
1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 4.2.2, 4.3.3, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4
Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Progress Payments
2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3
Owner's Right to Clean Up Project, Definition of the
6.3 1.1.4
Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Project Management Protective Liability
Award Separate Contracts Insurance
6.1 11.3
Owner's Right to Stop the Work Project Manual, Definition of the
2.3 1.1.7
Owner's Right to Suspend the Work Project Manuals
14.3 2.2.5
Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract Project Representatives
14.2 4.2.10
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications Property Insurance
and Other Instruments of Service 10.2.5, 11.4
1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.2.1, 3.11.1, 3.17.1, 4.2.12, 5.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Partial Occupancy or Use 10
9.6.6, 9.9, 11.4.1.5 Regulations and Laws
1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Site Inspections
13.5.2, 13.6, 14 1.2.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Rejection of Work Site Visits, Architect's
3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Releases and Waivers of Liens Special Inspections and Testing
9.10.2 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Representations Specifications, Definition of the
1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 1.1.6
9.8.2, 9.10.1 Specifications, The
Representatives 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17
2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, Statute of Limitations
13.2.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Resolution of Claims and Disputes Stopping the Work
4.4, 4.5, 4.6 2.3, 4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stored Materials
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4
10 Subcontractor, Definition of
Retainage 5.1.1
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 SUBCONTRACTORS
Review of Contract Documents and Field 5
Conditions by Contractor Subcontractors, Work by
1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,
Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 9.6.7
Architect Subcontractual Relations
3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1,
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and 14.2.1, 14.3.2
Samples by Contractor Submittals
3.12 1.6, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2,
Rights and Remedies 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3
1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, Subrogation, Waivers of
5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7
12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Substantial Completion
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
3.17 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7
Rules and Notices for Arbitration Substantial Completion, Definition of
4.6.2 9.8.1
Safety of Persons and Property Substitution of Subcontractors
10.2, 10.6 5.2.3, 5.2.4
Safety Precautions and Programs Substitution of Architect
3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 4.1.3
Samples, Definition of Substitutions of Materials
3.12.3 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3.7
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Sub-subcontractor, Definition of
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 5.1.2
Samples at the Site, Documents and Subsurface Conditions
3.11 4.3.4
Schedule of Values Successors and Assigns
9.2, 9.3.1 13.2
Schedules, Superintendent
1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.Construction12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 3.9, 10.2.6
6.1.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures
Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3,
1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14
11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Surety
Shop Drawings, Definition of 4.4.7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2
3.12.1 Surety, Consent of
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 9.10.2, 9.10.3
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Surveys
Site, Use of 2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 4.3.10, 14.2.4
14.4 Waiver of Liens
Suspension of the Work 9.10.2, 9.10.4
5.4.2, 14.3 Waivers of Subrogation
Suspension or Termination of the Contract 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7
4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Warranty
Taxes 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2,
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4 13.7.1.3
Termination by the Contractor Weather Delays
4.3.10, 14.1 4.3.7.2
Termination by the Owner for Cause Work, Definition of
4.3.10, 5.4.1.1, 14.2 1.1.3
Termination of the Architect Written Consent
4.1.3 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2,
Termination of the Contractor 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2
14.2.2 Written Interpretations
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6
CONTRACT Written Notice
14 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5,
Tests and Inspections 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6,
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14
9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 Written Orders
TIME 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2,
8 13.5.2, 14.3.1
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,
7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4,
8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9,
9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
13.7, 14
Time Limits on Claims
4.3.2, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6
Title to Work
9.3.2, 9.3.3
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
12
Uncovering of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions
4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
Unit Prices
4.3.9, 7.3.3.2
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2, 9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the Architect
13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
4.3.10, 9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7,
12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4
Waiver of Consequential Damages
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement),
Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda
issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after
execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a
Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by
the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other
documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,
the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).

§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT

The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written
or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the
Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons
or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and
enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.

§ 1.1.3 THE WORK

The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT

The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.

§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS

The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and
dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL

The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample
forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.

§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by
one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the
indicated results.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION
§ 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles
of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION
§ 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any"
and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears
in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

§ 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or
both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request.

§ 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,
become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
§ 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the
Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the
Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications
and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the
Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law,
statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the
Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of
the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's
consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are
not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other
projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the
Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material
or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and
other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution
of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory
copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and
the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's
consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§ 2.1 GENERAL
§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means
the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,
usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein.

§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

§ 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter,
furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's
obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or
continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such
financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Section 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the
Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent
changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of
information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the
Work.

§ 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner
with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work
under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for
such information or services.

§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such
copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work.

§ 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK

§ 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the
cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a
duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,
except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK

§ 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and
fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction
of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the
Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within
such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies,
the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the
reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's
additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts
charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§ 3.1 GENERAL
§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's
authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§ 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor
shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the
Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of
any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.
These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of
discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or
omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in
such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the
Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and
not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes,
ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the
Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.

§ 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions
issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1
and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to
perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as
would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the
Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or
for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor
recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect.

§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences
and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents
give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions
concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the
jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner
and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the
Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any
resulting loss or damage.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or
on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect
and in accordance with a Change Order.
§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other
persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not
skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 WARRANTY
§ 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the
Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the
Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to
the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions
not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for
damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient
maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.6 TAXES
§ 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor
which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely
scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and
completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally
required when bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes
that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect
and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.

§ 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and
rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate
responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES
§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable
objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:

.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and
all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly
by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual
costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section
3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay
in the Work.
§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important
communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written
request in each case.

§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and
Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the
Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is
coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review
submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE

§ 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and
selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and
similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for
submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.

§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of
their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract
Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.
Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in
the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the
Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of
separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and
approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor
represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction
criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been
approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the
absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's
responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear
such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such
design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design
criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take
other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.13 USE OF SITE

§ 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 CLEANING UP
§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and
about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus
materials.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost
thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.

§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK

§ 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress
wherever located.

§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS

§ 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for
infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account
thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations
are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a
patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.

§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered
by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3,
the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and
employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to
attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a
Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,
regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which
would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,
a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

§ 4.1 ARCHITECT
§ 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing
architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents
shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the
Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
Architect.

§ 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be
an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's
concurrence, from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2. The
Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the
Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress
and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and
deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that
the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will
not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.
The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since
these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in
Section 3.3.1.

§ 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be
responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other
persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall
endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the
Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications
by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with
separate contractors shall be through the Owner.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever
the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of
the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or
completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or
not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,
Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such
as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken
with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or
separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate
review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of
equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract
Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations
under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless
otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item
is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.
§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date
of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties
and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate
for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of, the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no
agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in
compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish
such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations
and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will
not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

§ 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or
interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the
Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor
arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.

§ 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event
giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,
whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party.

§ 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing
or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the
Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly
investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost
of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially
different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,
the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in
opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If
the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted,
but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the
adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to
Section 4.4.
§ 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,
written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required
for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6.

§ 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written
interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,
(3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5)
termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be
filed in accordance with this Section 4.3.

§ 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time

§ 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided
herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary.

§ 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented
by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably
anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or
property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally
responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within
a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other
party to investigate the matter.

§ 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for
consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,
business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in
accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of
liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

§ 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding
those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial
decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all
Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed
after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The
Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the
following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from
the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5)
advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to
evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be
inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.

§ 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from
either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a
decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.

§ 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,
such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the
requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the
Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the
Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and
which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection
of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.

§ 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and
arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after
the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration
within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and
Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may
be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties
concerned.

§ 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but
is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a
possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and
request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by
the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration.

§ 4.5 DISPUTES
§ 4.5.1 All disputes shall be resolved in the Centre County Court of Common Pleas, Bellefonte, PA

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor"
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-
subcontractor.

§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing
stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such
proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no
reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively
in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.

§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS

§ 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the
Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may
be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS

§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided
that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's
compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

§ 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's
own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3.
§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The
Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual
agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate
contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations
related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without
excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.

§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the
Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.

§ 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a
separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The
Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly
timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP

§ 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under
their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,
the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

§ 7.1 GENERAL
§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the
Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the
Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS

§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and
Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3.

§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and
Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change
Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
percentage fee; or
.4 as provided in Section 7.3.6.

§ 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.

§ 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor
therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,
the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and
savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract
Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor
shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with
appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this
Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor
or others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to
the Work; and
 .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in
dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change
Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in
dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those
costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the
right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4.

§ 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate
Change Order.

§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

§ 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the
Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor
shall carry out such written orders promptly.

ARTICLE 8 TIME
§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically
defined.

§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be
furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the
effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a
notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or
other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and
other security interests.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion
within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by
changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or
by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by
Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of
the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUM
§ 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount
payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

§ 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values
allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its
accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for
reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values.
Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to
payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material
suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of
the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor
does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others
whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance
by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location
agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT

§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to
the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is
properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification
in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work
has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the
quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an
evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of
subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary
to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot
be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is
responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or
equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts
previously withheld.

§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the
amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said
Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of
such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,
require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a
Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
§ 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and
9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by
the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT

§ 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days
after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven
days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by
arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the
Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and
the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and
start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not
included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor
shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the
Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if
any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the
Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract
Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use
shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the
Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of
a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the
Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue
a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on
the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the
final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further
representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment
have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts
withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by
the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after
payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the
Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the
Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to
certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from:
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
 .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a
waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at
the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
§ 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-
subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated
by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its
safety.

§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

§ 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons
resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB),
encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop
Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§ 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material
or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify
that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in
writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests
verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe
containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in
writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If
either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall
propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or
substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner
and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the
amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be
accomplished as provided in Article 7.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,
Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,
damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a
party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the
Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.

§ 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of
a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the
Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.6 EMERGENCIES
§ 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's
discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by
the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

§ 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which
the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the
Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
the Contractor's employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of
ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under
Section 3.18.
§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an
occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work
until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.

§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of
the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that
coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written
notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after
final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall
be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction
of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by
the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.

§ 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

§ 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance.

§ 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE

§ 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective
Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and
Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of
purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for
purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with
such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under
Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.

§ 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner,
Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the
proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

§ 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as
additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1.

§ 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE

§ 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's
risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the
site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are
beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or
entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered,
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Project.

§ 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,
insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without
duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework,
testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and
expenses required as a result of such insured loss.

§ 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of
the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to
commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or
maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.

§ 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such
deductibles.

§ 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work
in transit.

§ 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or
otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or
companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.

§ 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance
required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during
installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.

§ 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will
insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The
Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including
consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§ 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such
insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

§ 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring
the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section
11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

§ 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.

§ 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's
consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,
agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance
obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they
have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall
require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where
legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall
provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a
person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or
otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an
insurable interest in the property damaged.

§ 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made
payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any
applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of
insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against
proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with
an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6. If after such loss no other
special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged
property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article
7.

§ 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such
objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in
the case of arbitration, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution
of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.

§ 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

§ 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.

§ 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment
of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a
copy to be made.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the
Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine
prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If
such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate
Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,
correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor
in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.

§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or
not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and
inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties
established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after
discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or
Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual
performance of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or
partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year
period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor
to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract
Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish
the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK

§ 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum
will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has
been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAW
§ 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.

§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other
party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the
other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing
construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations
under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such
assignment.
§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
§ 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member
of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by
registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice.

§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available
by law.

§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a
breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.

§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.
Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an
independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall
bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The
Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are
received or negotiations concluded.

§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require
additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written
authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such
costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense.

§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the
Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.6 INTEREST
§ 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at
such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to
time at the place where the Project is located.

§ 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD

§ 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor:
.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of
Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged
 cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of
Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act
occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final
Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged
cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to
run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later
than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under
Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor
under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or
obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for
any of the following reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to
be stopped;
.2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be
stopped;
.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or
.4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days'
written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery,
including reasonable overhead, profit and damages.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional
days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper
materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
 .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having
jurisdiction; or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause
exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the
Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor
and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the
Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by
the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for
the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not
expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case
may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive
termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by
suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include
profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the
Contractor shall:
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;
and
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the
notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts
and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on
the Work not executed.
 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

The Supplementary General Conditions are intended to compliment, modify and/or

amend the "General Conditions" of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201
as set forth in Part III of these Specifications. Where the same subject is covered in
both sections in the absence of conflict, they shall jointly apply, where conflict occurs
the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern.

ARTICLE 15 - INSURANCE

(a) The Contractor shall not commence work until he has obtained all the insurance
required hereunder and such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor
shall the Contractors allow any subcontractor to commence work on his
subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor has been so
obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the Owner shall not
relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractors hereunder. See Article 4.18,
Indemnification.

(b) Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance - The Contractor shall take out
and maintain during the life of this contract, the statutory Workman's
Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for all of his employees to be
engaged in work on the project under this contract and, in case any such work is
sublet, each Contractor shall require his subcontractors similarly to provide
Workman's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for all of the latter's
employees to be engaged in such work. Employees Liability Insurance shall be
for an amount of not less than $100,000 each accident; $500,000 policy limit;
and $100,000 each employee.

(c) Automobile Insurance - Each Contractor and all of his subcontractors shall carry
automobile insurance covering licensed vehicles, said insurance to have the
following policy limits:

Combined Single Limit - $1,000,000 per accident

Each Contractor and all of his subcontractors shall carry comprehensive

automobile insurance covering non-owned vehicles and hired cars, said
insurance to have the same limits as immediately above.

(d) Commercial General Liability Insurance - Each Contractor and all of his
subcontractors shall maintain a policy of comprehensive general liability
insurance including the following areas of coverage and policy limits:

1. Each Occurrence - $1,000,000 per person

x-1
 2. Damage to Rented Premises - $100,000 per occurrence

3. Medical Expenses - $5,000 per one person

4. Personal & Advertising Injury - $1,000,000

5. General Aggregate - $2,000,000

6. Products – Comp/OP Aggregate - $2,000,000

(f) Professional Liability

$1,000,000 each claim

$1,000,000 aggregate

(e) Certificates of Insurance

Certificates evidencing the foregoing insurance coverage shall be filed with the
Construction Manager and shall be subject to approval by the Owner for
accuracies of protection. All policies shall be open to inspection by the Owner.
If the Contractors or any of their subcontractors fail to effect or maintain
insurance as required, the Owner may insure his own interest and charge the
cost thereof to the Contractors.

Said policies and certificates shall certify, among other things, that the insurance
will not be canceled nor lapsed during the progress of the work covered by these
specifications without first giving the Owner ten (10) days notice in writing.

It is expressly understood that the Contractors and all subcontractors herein are
independent contractors, and that the employee of the Contractors or
subcontractors shall in no way be construed to be employees of the Owner.

ARTICLE 16 - GUARANTEE

The Contractor hereby guarantees as a part of his contract that all apparatus and
materials used under this contract are of the best quality and workmanship as
specified herein and that all work has been done in a thorough and workmanlike
manner, that all work will be free from defects in material and workmanship and that
any defects that may develop within a period of one year from the date of completion
of his work will be made good as a part thereof, at no cost to the Owner.

x-2
ARTICLE 17 - MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A) Three (3) complete copies of the maintenance manual, labeled Sprinkler &
Standpipe Systems, shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for approval
in heavy, three-ring, loose leaf binders. The copies shall be submitted on or
before the submission for final payment.

B) The manuals shall be typewritten and include a table of contents. The

information shall be arranged in a logical order for use in maintaining the project.

C) The manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Table of Contents

2. Material List with place of purchase

3. List of normally replaced items, such as valves, washers, cartridges, fuses

lamps, etc., indicating style, rating, size, etc., and place of purchase.

4. Color Coding Schedule.

5. Installation, Servicing, Maintenance, and Operating Instructions for all

systems and components with place of purchase and name, address, and
phone number of person servicing system including:

a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
b. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-
in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control,
stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and
winter operating instructions.
c. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and
adjusting instructions.
d. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

6. Manufacturer's Guarantees and Warranties

7. Approved copies of all shop drawings including wiring diagrams of all

installed systems indicating all connections, color coding, functions,
locations, etc.

8. One-line diagram indicating locations, electrical characteristics, circuit

numbers and sizes.

x-3
10. Copy of all inspection certificates and approvals from all required inspection
agencies.

x-4
3/26/2010 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/da…
General Decision Number: PA100027 03/26/2010 PA27

Superseded General Decision Number: PA20080027

State: Pennsylvania

Construction Type: Building

County: Centre County in Pennsylvania.

BUILDING & FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION: Building erection and

Foundation Excavation, (does not include residential
construction consisting of single family homes or apartments up
to and including 4 stories), (Excluding Sewage and Water
Treatment Plant Projects)

Modification Number Publication Date

0 03/12/2010
1 03/26/2010

ASBE0023-005 06/29/2009

Rates Fringes

Asbestos Workers/Insulator
(Includes the application of
all insulating materials,
protective coverings,
coatings and finishes to all
types of mechanical systems).....$ 29.88 18.83
----------------------------------------------------------------
BRPA0005-047 05/03/2009

CENTRE COUNTY (Except Halfmoon, Huston, Patton, Rush, Taylor,

and Worth Twps.

Rates Fringes

BRICKLAYER.......................$ 28.12 13.15

----------------------------------------------------------------
* BRPA0009-002 12/01/2009

CENTRE COUNTY (Halfmoon, Huston, Patton, Rush, Taylor, and

Worth Twps)

Rates Fringes

BRICKLAYER.......................$ 25.61 13.46

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0900-003 06/01/2009

Rates Fringes

CARPENTER (Including Drywall

xi-1
wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/…/PA27.dvb 1/4
3/26/2010 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/da…
Hanging, Metal Stud &
Accoustical Ceiling
Installation)....................$ 24.79 9.66
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0005-004 12/25/2009

Rates Fringes

Electrician....................$ 34.26 17.88

----------------------------------------------------------------
ENGI0066-014 07/01/2008

Rates Fringes

Power equipment operators:

Backhoe, Bulldozer, Crane,
Forklift (Lull or
Similar), and Loader........$ 24.565 12.07
Forklift (Ridden or Self-
Propelled)..................$ 21.89 12.07
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0772-002 06/01/2009

Rates Fringes

Ironworkers:
Structural & Reinforcing....$ 24.73 19.94

A. HOLIDAYS

The following holidays shall be observed: New Years Day,

Goodfriday, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day,
Veterans Day (Observed the day after Thanksgiving),
Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day.

Any holiday which occurs on Sunday shall be observed the

following Monday.
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0057-010 08/01/2009

Rates Fringes

Painters:
Spray.......................$ 24.77 12.63
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0520-001 05/01/2009

Rates Fringes

PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC

Pipe Work).......................$ 30.27 18.04
----------------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0019-001 06/01/2009

Rates Fringes

Sheet metal worker...............$ 29.56 28.85+A

wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/…/PA27.dvb
xi-2 2/4
3/26/2010 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/da…

FOOTNOTE: A. Paid Holiday: Election Day

----------------------------------------------------------------
SUPA1989-001 10/01/1989

Rates Fringes

CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 14.40

Elevator Constructor
Mechanics...................$ 12.77 3.06

Laborers:
Landscape Workers...........$ 9.69
Unskilled...................$ 11.75 3.09

PAINTER..........................$ 10.82 4.50

Including Drywall Finishing

PLUMBER..........................$ 13.14 2.39

ROOFER, Including Built Up,

Composition and Single Ply
Roofs............................$ 8.00 .63

TILE SETTER......................$ 14.00

TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 7.27 .79

----------------------------------------------------------------

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing

operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within

the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

----------------------------------------------------------------

In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates

listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations
indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
prevailing.

----------------------------------------------------------------

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS

1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:

* an existing published wage determination

* a survey underlying a wage determination
* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
xi-3
wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/…/PA27.dvb 3/4
3/26/2010 http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/da…
a wage determination matter
* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations

Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an

interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

Wage and Hour Administrator

U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the

interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an

interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:

Administrative Review Board

U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.

================================================================

END OF GENERAL DECISION

xi-4
wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/…/PA27.dvb 4/4
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Access to site.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: State College Borough Municipal Building Green Roof.

1. Project Location: 243 South Allen Street

State College, Pennsylvania 16801

B. State College Borough, 243 South Allen Street, State College, Pennsylvania 16801

1. Owner's Representative: Thomas J. Fountaine II, Borough Manager.

C. Architect: Haas Building Solutions, Inc.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

The building is the existing Municipal Building for the Borough of State College. The
work for the project will be limited to a green roof on the 2nd story roof at the corner of
South Allen and Foster Ave, a new window, supporting steel in the ceiling immediately
below the roof, and a green roof.

During the new beam installation, temporary demolition of ceiling items is required
including: sprinkler piping, ductwork, lighting, electrical conduit, roof drain lines, and

SUMMARY 011000 - 1
 gypsum board bulkhead. Once the new beams are installed, all ceiling items are to be
returned to their original configurations.

After the new beams are in place, work can be started on the roof including: installation
of a new window, removal of ballast, installation of new EPDM slip sheet, placement of
new green roof modules, installation of RoofEdge, filling perimeter with ballast and area
around roof drains with ballast.

Type of Contract.

1. Project will be constructed under one prime contract: General Construction including
structural steel, and the Green Roof.

1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. The Work shall be conducted in phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated:

1. Temporary demolition and structural steel work is projected to begin on May 17, 2010

2. Project needs to be completed by August 20, 2010 (to minimize University disruptions),
and final applications for payment need to be in by the end of July

B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of the Contractor's
construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates for all
phases of the Work.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas and phases in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the areas and phase of work as indicated.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused
by construction operations.

SUMMARY 011000 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
Seven a.m. to 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.

1. As per Owner’s requirements and/ or restrictions.

2. No work shall be done July 4-11 without Owner’s written permission

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances within the existing building and on the
Project site is not permitted.

SUMMARY 011000 - 3
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the
Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part
of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

SUMMARY 011000 - 4
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.

ALTERNATES 012300 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: New Conventional Green Roof in lieu of modular green roof system

1. Base Bid: To furnish and install modular green roof system according to drawings. No
conventional green roof will be installed as part of the base bid.
2. Alternate: Furnish and install new conventional green roof including soil, plantings, and
associated items according to spec section 329501 in lieu of modular green roof system.

END OF SECTION 012300

ALTERNATES 012300 - 2
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles. If retaining last option in first subparagraph below, insert
a sample of the form to be used in the Project Manual.

1. Substitution Request Form: Will be provided by the Architect.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

 h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within fifteen working days of receipt of request, or seven
working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need
for change, but not later than fifteen working days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2

 b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience will be considered only if they present a cost or time savings
over the original specified item for which the substitution request is being proposed.

C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within thirty days after the Notice to Proceed.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. No
additional work is to be performed without written direction from the Architect and Owner.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress
or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 14 working days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating
cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Lump sum change order proposals will not be accepted. Provide itemized lists of
all labor materials and equipment required to perform the work described in the
proposal request.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. No
additional work is to be performed without written direction from the Architect and Owner.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified.
7. Lump sum change order proposals will not be accepted. Provide itemized lists of all labor
materials and equipment required to perform the work described in the proposal request.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven
working days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each
phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. Retain
option in first subparagraph below where Contractor's ongoing activities related to project
closeout will be a line item subject to Application for Payment approval.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
in excess of five percent of Contract Sum.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the last
working day of the month. Contractors are to submit their application for Payment to the
Architect by the 25th of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one
month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
for Applications for Payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.
Sample copies are included in the Project Manual.

F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2

 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.

G. Transmittal: Submit four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3

 K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project meetings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "017300 - Execution" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during
construction.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

 and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.

1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with

requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2

 6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's
responsibility.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: The Construction Manager will provide the form on which RFI’s are to be
submitted.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3

 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within ten
working days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven working days if
Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: The Architect will prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by
the RFI number which will include the following:

1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Architect will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within five working days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than
fifteen working days after Notice of Award.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4

 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Sustainable design requirements.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises and existing building.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
and Owner's Commissioning Authority, of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5

 g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings as follows:

1. Progress meetings with Contractors and Owner- Biweekly.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6

 1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
3. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals upon receipt of the an
executed data licensing agreement from the Contractor.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form included below.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

 <Must be on the letterhead of Construction or Fabrication Company>
<enter date here>

Mr. Dallas L. Miller, AIA, LEED AP

Haas Building Solutions, Inc.
1301 North Atherton Street
State College, Pennsylvania 16803

Reference: State College Borough Municipal Building Green Roof

State College, Pennsylvania
Project No. 09-052

Dear Mr. Miller

<Construction or Fabrication Company’s Name> is requesting that Haas Building Solutions,

Inc. provide electronic files for our company convenience and use in the preparation of shop
drawings related to the State College Borough Municipal Building Green Roof subject to the
following terms and conditions:

• Our hardware and software are compatible with the following: either Microstation V8 or
later or AutoCAD 2008 or later for Windows XP or later on an Intel processor. We
understand that Haas Building Solutions, Inc. makes no representation as to the com-
patibility of these files with our hardware or our software beyond the specific release of
the requested documents.

• We acknowledge that data contained on these electronic files are part of an instrument
of service of Haas Building Solutions, Inc. and shall not be used by us or anyone else
receiving this data, through or from our firm, for any purpose other than as a conven-
ience in the preparation of shop drawings for the referenced project. Any other use or
reuse by us or by others will be at our sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to
you. We agree to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law
any claim or cause of action of any nature against you, your officers, directors, employ-
ees, agents or subconsultants that may arise out of, or in connection with, our use of the
electronic files. Haas Building Solutions, Inc. is deemed the author of the drawings and
data, and shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copy-
rights.

• Furthermore, we shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold Haas
Building Solutions, Inc. harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including rea-
sonable attorneys’ fees and defense cost, arising out of or resulting from our use of
these electronic files.

• We also acknowledge that these electronic files are not construction documents. Differ-
ences may exist between these electronic files and corresponding hard-copy construc-
tion documents prepared by Haas Building Solutions, Inc.. If discrepancies exist be-
tween the hard copy construction documents and the electronic files, the hard copy con-
struction documents shall govern. We are responsible for determining if any conflict ex-
ists and notifying Haas Building Solutions, Inc. when a conflict exists. By our use of

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2

 • Because information presented on the electronic file can be modified, unintentionally or
otherwise, we understand that you reserve the right to remove all indications of owner-
ship and/or involvement from each electronic display.

We request you to furnish us with electronic files of the following plans:

<list sheets here>

We also understand that under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for our
use be deemed a sale by Haas Building Solutions, Inc. and Haas Building Solutions, Inc.
makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, of the merchantability and fitness for any
particular purpose. In no event shall Haas Building Solutions, Inc. be liable for any loss of
profit or any consequential damages as a result of our use or reuse of these electronic files.

Sincerely,

___________________
<typed name of the signature>
< Construction or Fabrication Company’s Name >

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.

a. Architect reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. The Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow seven working days for review of each resubmittal.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3

 D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy
submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of subcontractor.
f. Name of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Other necessary identification.

E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic

submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4

 i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Related physical samples submitted directly.
m. Other necessary identification.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect and Construction Manager.

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review received from sources other than appropriate Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: The Architect will provide a copy of the transmittal form to be used.
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as
related submittal.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from
Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5

 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site
specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit seven paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
5. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
6. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.

7. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in

Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6

 c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Seven paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will
return two copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based upon Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Seven opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain five copies;
remainder will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7

 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project record sample.

1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Seven paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies.

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Payment Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures."

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.

1. Submit subcontract list in the following format:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8

 a. PDF electronic file.
b. Number of Copies: one paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise
indicated

I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project

Management and Coordination."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9

 before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed
either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and

other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of
certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and
system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01

Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10

3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to

verify performance characteristics.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

 E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems.

1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2

 2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-
resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3

 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4

 d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven working days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven working days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to the Contractor and
the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5

 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to

observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the
Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6

 G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,
and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.

REFERENCES 014200 - 1
 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ACI American Concrete Institute

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association

AGA American Gas Association

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The)

AHA American Hardboard Association

(Now part of CPA)

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

REFERENCES 014200 - 2
 AI Asphalt Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects (The)

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction

ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.

APA Architectural Precast Association

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association

APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)

API American Petroleum Institute

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

(See ASCE)

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

ASME ASME International

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

ASTM ASTM International

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)

AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry

REFERENCES 014200 - 3
 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

AWPA American Wood Protection Association

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

BIA Brick Industry Association (The)

BICSI BICSI, Inc.

BIFMA BIFMA International

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee

BWF Badminton World Federation

(Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation)

CCC Carpet Cushion Council

CDA Copper Development Association

CEA Canadian Electricity Association

CEA Consumer Electronics Association

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.

CGA Compressed Gas Association

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council

CPA Composite Panel Association

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association

REFERENCES 014200 - 4
 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The)

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CSA Canadian Standards Association

CSA CSA International

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)

CSI Cast Stone Institute

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau

CTI Cooling Technology Institute

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)

DHI Door and Hardware Institute

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.

ESD ESD Association

(Electrostatic Discharge Association)

ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball

(The International Basketball Federation)

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball

(The International Volleyball Federation)

FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC

FM Global FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)

FMRC Factory Mutual Research

(Now FM Global)

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.

REFERENCES 014200 - 5
 FSA Fluid Sealing Association

FSC Forest Stewardship Council

GA Gypsum Association

GANA Glass Association of North America

GRI (Part of GSI)

GS Green Seal

GSI Geosynthetic Institute

HI Hydraulic Institute

HI Hydronics Institute

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.

IAS International Approval Services

(Now CSA International)

IBF International Badminton Federation

(Now BWF)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.

ISO International Organization for Standardization

Available from ANSI

REFERENCES 014200 - 6
 ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association

ITS Intertek Testing Service NA

(Now ETL SEMCO)

ITU International Telecommunication Union

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association

LMA Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)

LPI Lightning Protection Institute

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.

MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America

MIA Marble Institute of America

MPI Master Painters Institute

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

NACE NACE International

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute

REFERENCES 014200 - 7
 NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations

NFPA NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council

NGA National Glass Association

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority

NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)

NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

NSF NSF International

(National Sanitation Foundation International)

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)

NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association

(Now TRI)

NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association

(Now WDMA)

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.

(Now ITS)

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute

REFERENCES 014200 - 8
 PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute

PLANET Professional Landcare Network

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute

RIS Redwood Inspection Service

SAE SAE International

SDI Steel Deck Institute

SDI Steel Door Institute

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association

SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

(See ASCE)

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council

SIA Security Industry Association

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

(Now IGMA)

SJI Steel Joist Institute

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)

REFERENCES 014200 - 9
 SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

STI Steel Tank Institute

SWI Steel Window Institute

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.

(Now TCNA)

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc.

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance

TMS The Masonry Society

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

TPI Turfgrass Producers International

TRI Tile Roofing Institute

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

USAV USA Volleyball

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association)

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)

WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)

REFERENCES 014200 - 10
 WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association

WWPA Western Wood Products Association

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

ICC International Code Council

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

UBC Uniform Building Code (Now ICC)

UCC Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

DOC Department of Commerce

DOD Department of Defense

DOE Department of Energy

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

FAA Federal Aviation Administration

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FDA Food and Drug Administration

GSA General Services Administration

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development

REFERENCES 014200 - 11
 LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory

NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program

(See TRB)

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration

PBS Public Buildings Service

(See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science

RUS Rural Utilities Service

(See USDA)

SD State Department

TRB Transportation Research Board

USDA Department of Agriculture

USPS Postal Service

Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

Available from Government Printing Office

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus

(See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)

FS Federal Specification
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

Available from Defense Standardization Program

REFERENCES 014200 - 12
 Available from General Services Administration

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

Available from Access Board

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and
Thermal Insulation

CCR California Code of Regulations

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission

TFS Texas Forest Service

Forest Resource Development

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 014200

REFERENCES 014200 - 13
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility

interruptions.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,
Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units will not be allowed as there is no room on
the property to accommodate them.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: All storage and fabrication will take place off-site or in the All-
Purpose Room with written permission from the Owner and the Architect.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
2. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille
in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2

 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Construction personnel cannot park on-site and must arrange for off-site parking
accommodations. .

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.

F. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide
shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.

2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become
damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make
required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3. Coordinate use with the Owner

G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no
evidence remains of correction work.

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: coordinate with the Owner.

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3

 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.
2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by
authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security
locks where openings are required.
5. Protect air-handling equipment.
6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

 product request within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3

 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3. Products:

a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be
considered. See Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be
considered. See Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4

 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines
and levels, and final cleaning.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner

EXECUTION 017300 - 1
 that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems,
and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.

EXECUTION 017300 - 2
 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility, Architect and Owner that is
necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or
other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities
having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

EXECUTION 017300 - 3
 D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

EXECUTION 017300 - 4
 F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.

H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

EXECUTION 017300 - 5
 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section

"Quality Requirements."

EXECUTION 017300 - 6
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION 017300

EXECUTION 017300 - 7
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Form to be
used will be provided by the Architect.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2

 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first] [and]
[proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Two paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one Insert
number copies.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package
into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item.
Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC
levels.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4

 n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

END OF SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

B. Related Sections:

1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file.
Submit three non-rewritable compact discs to the Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

B. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least fifteen days before commencing demonstration and training.
Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect’s and Commissioning Agent's
comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within fifteen days of receipt of
Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Architect.
7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent.
8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon
file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system
and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names
in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel
upon opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2

 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf or post-type binders as
required by the contents and in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to
hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing
contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate
volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3

 1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4

 E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5

 C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6

 D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition

and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site

improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. Comply with “Instructions to Bidders” Paragraph 20 "Pre-
Construction Photographs." Submit before Work begins.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.

C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic

Documentation."

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be remain Owner's property, remove
demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4

Copyright 2007 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/07

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and
comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Design connections under direct supervision of a structural Professional Engineer

experienced in design of this work and licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

F. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1

Copyright 2007 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/07

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference prior to delivery of beams.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-
steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC 360.

2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2

Copyright 2007 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/07

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested

and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at
testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3

Copyright 2007 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/07

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of bearing surfaces and locations of connections
for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Shim as required to ensure bearing of metal deck on structural members.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4

Copyright 2007 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/07

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Repairs and modifications to adhered EPDM membrane roofing system to accept the roof
terrace decking system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each product included in the roofing system.

D. Research/evaluation reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Maintenance data.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including for membrane roofing system from same
manufacturer as membrane roofing.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated,
as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 1

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Firestone Building Products.

2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.

3. Exposed Face Color: Black.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or

Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl
splice tape with release film.

B. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, pourable sealers,
reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, and other accessories.

2.3 AGGREGATE BALLAST

A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast (wash and reuse existing) that will withstand
weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane
degradation, of the following type and size:

1. Aggregate Type: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel

2. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 4, ranging in size from 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm).

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Loosely lay membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before
installing.

1. Comply with requirements in SPRI RP-4 for System 1.

B. Accurately align membrane roofing, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps
of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly
roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges
of membrane roofing terminations.

D. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of membrane roofing terminations.

E. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

F. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over membrane roofing at the rate required by membrane
roofing system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care to minimize
possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as membrane roofing is
installed, leaving membrane roofing ballasted at the end of the workday.

1. Ballast Weight: Size 4 aggregate, 10 lb/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m).

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 075323

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 3

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Urethane joint sealants.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers

eight samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. Use ASTM C 1087 to
determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain
rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.

D. Product test reports.

E. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

F. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.

G. Field-adhesion test reports.

H. Warranties.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing
indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water,
unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant : ASTM C 920.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2

 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

a. BASF Building Systems.

b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
e. Sonneborn

2. Type: Single component (S).

3. Grade: nonsag (NS).
4. Class: 25.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3

 B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between different materials listed above.
b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of windows.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: Match existing.

END OF SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5

 G U I D E S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
PROJECT-OUT / OUTSWING CASEMENT WINDOW
SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
This suggested guide specification has been developed using the current edition of the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
“Manual of Practice,” including the recommendations for the CSI 3 Part Section Format and the CSI Page Format. Additionally, the
development concept and organizational arrangement of the American Institute of Architects (AIA) MASTERSPEC Program have been
recognized in the preparation of this guide specification. Neither CSI nor AIA endorse specific manufacturer’s and products. The
preparation of the guide specification assumes the use of standard contract documents and forms, including the “Conditions of the
Contract,” published by the AIA.

PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 Summary
A. Section Includes: Kawneer Sealair® Commercial Grade Architectural Aluminum Windows, including glass and glazing at window
manufacturer’s factory, perimeter trims, sills and stools, window installation hardware and accessories, shims and anchors, and
perimeter sealing of window units.
1. Types of Kawneer Sealair Aluminum Windows include:
a. Storefront GLASSvent, Thermal (Structural Silicone Glazed), 2–3/4" Deep Frame, Outswing Casement (For Installation Into
Kawneer Storefront Systems). (C-HC40).

1.02 System Description

A. The windows shall be Architectural Aluminum Outswing Casement windows in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 or
NAFS-1 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum and Poly Prime Windows and Glass Doors for a Class and Grade of C-HC40 – C-
HC70 for Outswing Casement Windows.
B. Test Units
1. Conform to minimum size in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 or NAFS-1 for each test unit sizes and
configurations.
2. Units submitted for laboratory testing shall be manufacturer’s standard construction, glazed and assembled in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications and ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 or NAFS-1
C. Window Performance Requirements:
1. Air Infiltration:
a. Outswing Casement windows:When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a
minimum frame size of 36" x 60" Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft of sash perimeter at a static air pressure
differential of 6.24 psf.
2. Water Resistance:
a. Outswing Casement Windows: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 547 and
ASTM E 331 at a minimum frame size of 36" x 60". There shall be no leakage as defined in test method at a static air pressure
differential of 12 psf.
3. Uniform Design Load: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 40 psf and 70 psf shall be applied in the
positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330.
4. Uniform Load Structural Test:
a. Outswing Casement Windows: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 105 psf shall be applied in
the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. (1.5 x Design Load).
5. Thermal Transmittance (Conductive U-factor):
a. Outswing Casement Windows: When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the conductive thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall
2
not be more than 0.67 BTU/hr/ft /˚F.
6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less
than Frame 51, Glass 54.
or
Condensation Index (I): when tested to CSA-A440-00, the condensation index shall not be less than Frame 47, Glass 48.
7. Forced Entry Resistance: Windows shall conform to ASTM F588, Performance Level 10, or AAMA 1302.5.

085200-1 1
 1.03 Submittals
A. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit product data, shop drawings, samples, and other submittals in accordance with
“Conditions of the Contract” and Division 1 Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings, samples, and similar submittals are
defined in “Conditions of the Contract.”

1.04 Warranty
A. Project Warranty: Refer to “Conditions of the Contract” for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty.
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall
begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment.
2. Insulating Glass: Warranted to be free from defects (excluding breakage) for a period of five (5) years.

1.05 Quality Assurance

A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in
the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving
acceptable installer and approving application method.
B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's
installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer’s (Acceptable Manufacturer’s/Products)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers (Basis of design):
1. Address: Kawneer Company, Inc. or Kawneer Company Canada Limited
555 Guthridge Court, 1051 Ellesmere Road
Technology Park/Atlanta, Scarborough, Ontario M1P 2X1
Norcross, GA 30092
a. Telephone: 770 449 5555 416 755 7751
b. Fax: 770 734 1560 416 755 1829
2. Proprietary Product(s)/System(s): Kawneer Sealair® Architectural Windows.
a. Series: GLASSvent™, Outswing Casement
b. Finish/Color: (To match existing) (Refer to Finishes Section of the Kawneer Architectural Windows Manual)
3. Product(s)/System(s) Testing:
a. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA/NAFS-1: ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 or NAFS-1 for minimum product performance criteria.
B. Substitutions:
1. General: Refer to Division 1 Substitutions for procedures and submission requirements.
See Vistawall Architectural Products of Terrell, TX for ZS-2750 Zero Sightline Ventilator window.

a. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (5) days prior to bid date.
2. Substitution Documentation
a. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job
conditions.
b. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for
window system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum windows
for a period of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)
c. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement for window sizes required by the project.
d. Product Sample and Finish: Submit product sample, representative of window size for the project, with specified finish and color.
3. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or modification, and documented by a formal
change order signed by the Owner and Contractor.

2.02 Materials

2 085200-2
A. Aluminum (Windows and Components):
1. Material Standard: ASTM B221, G.S. 10A-T5; 6063-T5 alloy and temper.
2. Total Frame Depth: Not less than 2-1/8" (1/4" glass) or 2-3/4" (1" glass)
3. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements.
4. The frame and ventilator corner construction shall consist of a mitered corner joint with an internal clip, sealed and mechanically
staked.
5. The frame shall have a continuous primary weather seal of polyethylene clad urethane foam, the rainscreen weather stripping shall
be dual durometer Santoprene. Each corner shall be neatly mitered.
6. The frame and ventilator shall be factory fabricated and assembled.

2.03 Accessories
A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be 300 Series, Stainless Steel.
B. Standard Hardware:
1. Cast White Bronze Cam Locking Handles.
2. Stainless Steel 4-Bar Hinges.

2.04 Glass and Glazing

A. General: Glass thickness and type shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for prescribed design pressure.
Factory glazing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s standard requirements.

1. Material Compatibility: Glazing materials shall be of material compatible with aluminum and those sealants and sealing materials
used in the composite structure. Interior glazing tape shall be a foam-type tape installed per the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Manufacturer’s Standards: The structural seal and weather seal shall be silicone applied and cured per the silicone manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. For insulating glass, secondary seal shall be silcone sealant and be designed for 4-sided silicone applications.
B. Glass Materials: (Specifier To Choose)
1. Annealed Glass: ASTM C1036.
2. Glass Thickness ( 1") consisting of ( 1/4") exterior ( 1/2") spacer ( 1/4") interior.

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 Manufacturer’s Instructions/Recommendations
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product installation data and recommendations for installation requirements of window units,
hardware, and other components in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty provisions.

3.02 Examination
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable
for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive window units and sill plate
is level in accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances.
1. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements for window installation.

3.03 Preparation
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation.

3.04 Installation
A. General: Install window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash with manufacturer’s prescribed
tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place.
1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action contact points.
2. Weathertight Construction: Install sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets, to provide
weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction.
a. Refer to Division 7 Joint Sealants for installation requirements.

3.05 Field Quality Control

085200-3 3
 A. Field Tests: Architect shall select window units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed,
glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative
present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract
amount.
1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Division 1 Testing Section for payment of
testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 502, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and
ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test.
a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the
amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.15 cfm per foot of crack length, which ever is greater.
b. Water Penetration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when
tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use
recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.06 Adjusting and Cleaning

A. Adjusting: Adjust operating window components to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and
a weathertight closure.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean
installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from
project site and legally dispose of debris.
C. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum windows from damage from
grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. Remove and replace damaged
aluminum windows at no extra cost.

DISCLAIMER STATEMENT
This guide specification is intended to be used by a qualified construction specifier. The guide specification is not intended to be verbatim
as a project specification without appropriate modifications for the specific use intended. The guide specification must be used and
coordinated with the procedures of each design firm, and the particular requirements of a specific construction project.

END OF SECTION 08520

4 085200-4
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior gypsum board.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 25 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF GYPSUM PANELS

A. Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content
plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 25 percent by weight.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. G-P Gypsum.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.

B. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints or beveled panel edges and damaged surface areas, use setting-
type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3

 C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: In locations where bulkhead patching is required.

3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5

SECTION 099113-1 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.

1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.

2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue. All materials shall be stored in a single room that can be locked.
The University shall approve the room’s location. The storage place shall be neat and clean;
any oil rags and waste shall be properly cared for and every precaution taken to avoid fire. Fire
extinguishers shall be furnished in this area by the contractor.

B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.

C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

PAINTING 099113 - 1
 1. Quantity: 7 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material
and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified by
the following manufacturers:

1. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint).

2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.

C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air between 45 and 95 deg F.

D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

E. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PREPARATORY COATS

A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. M. A. B. Paint: Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mills.
2. Pittsburgh Paints: 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
3. Sherwin-Williams: PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

B. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer.

PAINTING 099113 - 2
 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

C. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer.

2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel (verify existing paint to match):

1. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Semi-Gloss 410 Line.

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex.
3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series.

B. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel:

1. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss 403 Line.

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi-Gloss
Oil.
3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

PAINTING 099113 - 3
 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so

surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

E. Material Preparation:

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings
in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

PAINTING 099113 - 4
 G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.

1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.

I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.

K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. Piping in mechanical and boiler rooms and
above finished ceilings does not have to be painted except for external corrosion control piping.

L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.

M. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.

N. All new work shall be a three coat system. Different shades of color shall be used for each coat.
The number of coats for existing work shall be as required to equal all new work:

1. Primer – one coat

2. Finish – two coats

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

PAINTING 099113 - 5
 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

If more than one type of gloss is required for finish coats on gypsum board, e.g., flat on ceilings and
semigloss on walls, indicated locations of each on Drawings, in finish schedules, or by inserts below.

Most architectural coatings withstand surface temperatures to approximately 200 deg F (93 deg C)
without problems. For hot-water and steam piping systems that are expected to exceed 200 deg F (93
deg C), insert a suitable acrylic or alkyd organic or a suitable epoxy coating.

END OF SECTION 09912

PAINTING 099113 - 6
  

Section 329500
Vegetated Roof Assemblies

Specification and Submittal Requirements for Public

Projects

Updated 10/5/2009 

LiveRoof, LLC
P.O. Box 533
Spring Lake, MI 49456

(800) 875-1392
www.liveroof.com
sales@liveroof.com

329500-1
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Provide equipment, materials, tools, and labor to install vegetated roofing modules. Modules to
include growth media and plants. This work shall also include edge treatments, custom shaping
of modules, and installing paver stones or ballast, slip sheet/root barrier and irrigation system, if
specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. To fully disclose merits of system and specifications, provide three (3) product catalogs
and supporting literature showing specifications and project photographs of completed
jobs.
B. In order to provide third party perspective, provide reference sheet listing 6 references of
owners and caretakers of green roof system.
C. To provide visual reference, conduct site visit and proposed dates to visit for 3 existing
projects using same green roof system, within 50 miles of project site.
D. To provide visual reference, provide two (2) sample vegetated modules, showing same or
similar product grown to maturity, with homogeneous mix of cutting grown plants, with
95 % or greater coverage, as it will be delivered to job site. Sample to be provided to
facility manager and owner of property or other as indicated.
E. To demonstrate soil quality, provide two (2) plastic bags, each containing a 1 cup (8 oz.)
sample of growing medium.
F. To conform to project requirements, provide additional agreements of warranty and
maintenance contract.
G. To ensure proper care, provide written maintenance protocol.
H. To ensure proper installation, provide written documentation of installation procedures. If
required for warranty and maintenance purposes, provide documentation showing
installer as being certified to install system.
I. To ensure Installer has been trained to efficiently and correctly install green roof system,
provide certificate of completion of training issued by green roof system manufacturer.
J. To facilitate planning and create installation efficiency, indicate length of time required
to install the green roof.
K. To provide evidence of wind and fire safety, demonstrate video evidence of fire-spread
testing and high speed wind resistance testing (minimum of 110 mph).
L. To ensure proper plant selection and efficient delivery, provide address and contact
information of professional horticulturist who will oversee planting and cultivation of
modules, within 300 miles of project location.
M. To ensure efficient and correct use of materials, submit shop drawings indicating layout
of modules, pavers, irrigation, and square footage.

329500-2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. No deviation should be made from this specification. Installer assumes liability for any
deviations from specification.
B. Only manufacturer-approved Installers may perform the green roof installation. Installers
must be certified prior to installation – contact manufacturer.
C. Prior to installing green roof modules, the following procedures are to be conducted:
1. The building Owner, Architect, or Engineer shall verify that the roof is properly
designed and constructed to adequately support the load of the green roof system.
2. The roof is to be flood tested for water tightness for 24 hours. Water testing shall
be witnessed and confirmed in writing by Owner’s Representative and/or Design
Professional, Waterproofing Contractor, Membrane Manufacturer, and
Installation Contractor.
3. Slipsheet/root barrier to be properly installed, seams overlapped and bonded, in
accord with architect’s and manufacturer’s specifications.
4. The roof is to be inspected and determined ready to accept the green roof modules
by a Technical Representative of the Installer.
D. Once the green roof installation is completed, an inspection is to be conducted by a
Technical Representative of the installer to verify that the green roof modules have been
installed tight against each other, in straight rows, corners aligned, properly oriented, and
tight against the edging.

1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. Review green roof installation
standardized procedures with supervisory staff.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION

A. Green roof modules are to be delivered in good condition free from shipping damage.
B. Modules are to be kept out of the sun if plastic wrapped to prevent overheating.
C. Modules are to be installed on the roof top within 4 hours of delivery.
D. On the job site, modules are to be handled to prevent damage to the modules themselves
and all roofing components.
E. To ensure optimum plant condition and safety, modules must be conveyed to the roof
using a rack designed specifically for this use and constructed according to engineer
approved and stamped plans. DO NOT stack modules during conveyance to rooftop or
installation.
F. Modules are to be conveyed to roof surface with equipment designed to carry the
collective load of the green roof modules and transport vehicle. Account for decreasing
load limits when boom (of crane or fork lift) is extended. Use crane stabilizers and take
all necessary precautions to protect building and personnel.

329500-3
 G. NEVER exceed the load capacity of the roof deck when placing green roof modules on
the roof.
H. When suspending modules and conveyance vehicle above deck, take precautions to
stabilize and prevent twisting of conveyance vehicle. Four tires or two four inch thick
sheets of Styrofoam is recommended.
I. During installation, protect the roof deck and membranes with appropriate material such
as plywood sheeting. NEVER scrape or puncture the slip sheet or membranes. Keep roof
surfaces free of soil, grit, or debris at all times with broom. Never set modules on top of
soil, dirt or grit.
J. Transport conveyors to be run parallel to the line of installation.
K. Transport carts to have pneumatic tires, to be wheeled about only upon protective
plywood sheeting, and to be loaded so as not to exceed weight capacity of roof deck.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 VEGETATED GREEN ROOF MODULE MANUFACTURER
A. For ease of handling during installation, future maintenance activities, storage, and
reduction in special sizes, the module system to be used comprising of 1’ x 2’ x 3” tray;
soil height raised to approximately 4 1/4” elevation with removable soil elevator.
B. To meet sustainability objectives, modules to be 100 % post-industrial recycled
polypropylene with 100 mil thick walls.
C. To meet plant growth, plant health, and maximum storm water absorption, module
system to have a minimum of 337 cu ft of soil per 1000 square feet of coverage.
D. To resist photo-degradation, module color to be black.
E. For optimal root health and drainage, module to have positive drain holes placed at
lowest point in the module.
F. For proper roof drainage and root health, module bottom to have water dispersal via its
drain channels of approximately 7.0 gallons per minute per lineal foot.
G. To optimize plant health and maximize storm water absorption, soil height approximately
4 ¼”.
H. To shield the module from photo-degradation and to promote plant health via sharing of
water and nutrients between the modules, the soil continuum is to be monolithic,
approximately 1 ¼ inch taller than modules, and shall obscure modules during all 12
months of the year for optimal year-round aesthetic presentation.
I. For plant health by sharing of water and nutrients between modules, soil to be joined via
subterranean moisture portals uniting soil from module to module.
J. To ensure minimal maintenance, plant material to cover minimum of 95 % of surface
area of soil within modules at time of delivery.
K. To ensure proper plant selection, efficient delivery and sustainable objectives, module
planting and cultivation to occur under supervision of professional horticulturist located
within 300 miles of project location.

329500-4
 L. To ensure adherence to proper installation procedures, green roof system manufacturer to
provide the Installer with in-person training of Standardized Installation Procedures.
M. To facilitate design, provide photos and descriptions of plant mixture or individually
specified plant species to be used.
N. To optimize logistical efficiency, during the growing season, April to Sept. 30, growing
time and method to be coordinated so as to mature on or before installation date. Time to
mature depends upon plant selection, climate, and time or year. Ask grower for specific
timeframes for individual project.
2.2 GROWING MEDIUM

A. To ensure sustainability, plant health and longevity, and minimal shrinkage, soil to be
enhanced German FLL 93 +% (by dry weight) inorganic content.

B. To ensure proper soil environment and allow for predictable maximum roof load during
rain storm, module saturated weight (with soil and fully vegetated) to range between 27
and 29 pounds per square foot.

2.3 PLANTS
Homogeneous mix of cutting grown highly drought resistant ground covers.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Edging: L-shaped extruded aluminum edging with perforations for drainage. Edging is
4½” x 3” with a minimum gauge of 210 mil. Edging, regardless of type, must allow for
adequate drainage via sufficient drain perforations at the bottom of the edging, with
sidewalls tall enough to cover the modules and contain the soil.
1. Edging required between modules and stone ballast or pavers.
2. If edging is attached to modules, use 10-24 x 1” wafer head self-tapping screws in
gray finish.

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GREEN ROOF INSTALLATION MUST BE CONDUCTED BY A MANUFACTURER-
APPROVED INSTALLER

3.2 PREPARATION OF ROOF SURFACE

A. Slip sheet/root barrier, specified by architect and approved by waterproofing and green
roof system manufacturer, of 40-60 mil. thickness with overlapped and effectively
bonded seams to ward against root penetration and to keep waterproofing layer safe and
clean from soil during installation. Slip sheet/root barrier typified as follows:

Glued Seam Types (40 mil or greater thickness)

-EPDM, with seams overlapped a minimum of 3 inches and glued with roll out adhesive
or double sided tape adhesive of the type that is impervious to and not affected by
moisture, and recommended by the manufacturer.

329500-5
 Refer to Section 075323 EPDM Roofing

Confirm compatibility of slip sheet and waterproofing membrane with manufacturer.

Never use duct tape or any other adhesive not recommended by the manufacturer.

Never use moisture holding fabric, such as needle punched polyethylene or felt, under the
green roof system. Such materials:

-Are impossible to sweep during installation

-Stay wet and encourage root growth and root penetration, and could lead to impeded
drainage; especially detrimental if a woody plant were to become established; such plants
have woody root systems and potentially could cause roof leaks.

B. Experienced Contractor to install slip sheet/root barrier in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. All surfaces to be smooth, free of debris, soil, and grit prior to placing modules. All
materials to be tested water tight and free draining prior to module placement.
D. All surfaces to be maintained clean and free of debris, soil, and grit during installation
process via use of broom. Never walk upon such materials as they may damage
membranes.
3.3 INSTALLATION SEASON
Module Installation to be conducted:

A. When plants are properly adapted and acclimatized to local weather conditions.
B. When weather is above 35° F and there is no ice on the roof and engineered soil is
unfrozen.
C. No later than the cut off date required by the green roof system provider’s warranty
terms, if applicable.

3.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION

A. Green roof modules are to be delivered in good condition free from shipping damage.
B. If plastic wrapped, modules are to be kept out of the sun to prevent overheating.
C. Modules are to be installed on the roof top within 4 hours of delivery.
D. On the job site, modules are to be handled to prevent damage to the modules themselves
and all roofing components.
E. To ensure optimum plant condition and safety, modules must be conveyed to the roof
using a rack designed specifically for this use and constructed according to engineer
approved and stamped plans. DO NOT stack modules during conveyance to rooftop or
installation.

329500-6
 F. Modules are to be conveyed to roof surface with equipment designed to carry the
collective load of the green roof modules and transport vehicle. Account for decreasing
load limits when boom (of crane or fork lift) is extended. Use crane stabilizers and take
all necessary precautions to protect building and personnel.
G. Never exceed the load capacity of the roof deck when placing green roof modules on the
roof.
H. When suspending modules and conveyance vehicle above deck, take precautions to
stabilize and prevent twisting of conveyance vehicle. Four tires or two four inch thick
sheets of Styrofoam is recommended.
I. During installation, protect the roof deck and membranes with appropriate material such
as plywood sheeting. Never scrape or puncture slip sheet or membranes. Keep roof
surfaces free of soil, grit, or debris at all times with broom. Never set modules on top of
soil, dirt or grit.
J. Transport conveyors to be run parallel to the line of installation.
K. Transport carts to have pneumatic tires, to be wheeled about only upon protective
plywood sheeting, and to be loaded so as not to exceed weight capacity of roof deck.
3.5 SAFEGUARDING SYSTEM INTEGRITY
Before working on roof, all Installers and Laborers to be:

A. Properly instructed in safety procedures and provided with green roof manufacturer’s
Guide to Standardized Installation Procedures.
B. Instructed to keep all work surfaces clean and debris free.
C. To report immediately any damage to membranes, protective sheeting, or drain elements
to supervisor, and to make appropriate repairs before proceeding.
D. Instructed in proper methods of green roof installation by manufacturer trained and
approved representative of installation company.
3.6 LAYING (PLACING) MODULES

A. Module installation to follow behind installation of slip sheet/root barrier, irrigation

system, pavers, ballast, and edging.
B. Module installation to be conducted in strict accordance with manufacturer installation
guidelines. Surface to be clean and swept free of soil, dirt, stones or grit before placing
each module. Rows to be straight, modules to be tight against each other with edges
overlapping and arranged in proper directional orientation. As soon as one row of
modules is surrounded completely by the parapet, edging, or other modules, pull all of
the plastic soil elevator inserts out of the modules. Pull the soil elevators while standing
on the slip sheet and avoid walking on the plants.
C. Module installation to be conducted in accordance with green roof design.
D. Modules to be placed directly on top of appropriate slip sheet/root barrier.

329500-7
 E. It is recommended that any custom cutting/fitting be oriented on the high side (top), or
sides of the roof. It is recommended that the cut side of the module be set tight against the
edging or toward the side of an intact module so as to prevent soil spillage. If custom
cutting must be done on the low, draining, side of the roof, it is imperative that no filter
cloth be inserted as it could impede drainage. It is best to orient the cut side against
another module, facing upstream.
F. After installing modules, they should be immediately watered so as to thoroughly
moisten the media from top to bottom. Water shall be of suitable quality for plant growth
and irrigation system or hoses and sprinklers may be used for such purpose. Note: it takes
approximately 1 inch of water, or 1¼ gallons per module to moisten each module
thoroughly.
3.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Documentation
Record all green roof maintenance events. Include name of person, date and activity.
1. If fertilizer, record type and amount applied per 1000sf
2. If soil test, record lab
3. If irrigation, record duration and quantity

B. Annual Maintenance
1. Soil Testing and Fertilization.

During April 1 to 15 of each year, administer an annual soil test for PH and
fertility levels.
a. Maintain pH in the range of 6.5 to 8.0. In the event that pH is outside of
the 6.5 to 8.0 range, consult the manufacturer for the appropriate
amendment.
b. Maintain fertility in the normal range using a typical field soil fertility test
as provided by A&L labs. When indicated, apply a single springtime
application of Nutricote 14 14 14, Type 180 (180 day release period) or
equivalent, at 20lbs per 1000sf. Follow the Nutricote labeled directions for
application rate, which take priority over any recommendations listed
here. Runoff potential does exist and should be evaluated by the applicator
in accord with the site specifics; the greater the runoff sensitivity, the
lower the application rate. All applications of fertilizer are the sole
responsibility of the applicator.

C. Irrigation
1. Watering

Even in the northern temperate zone of North America, successive watering may
sometimes be needed to keep green roof plants alive. Protracted hot dry weather
can result in plant thinning or death. In warmer climates, depending upon rainfall
and exposure, regular irrigation will probably be required. Regardless of
geography, the installation of an irrigation system is recommended and should be
appropriate to the scale of the project and able to allow for rapid and efficient

329500-8
 irrigation when needed as a “temporary” management tool under the following
conditions:

Prolonged hot dry weather, in the northern temperate zone, is generally defined as
periods of 75 degree weather, with less than 1” of rainfall persisting for 4 weeks
or longer. This time period will likely be less if the temperatures are hotter, the
climate warmer, on sloping rooftops, or roofs exposed to strong winds. Such
conditions can dry out the green roof substrate and cause the plants to go dormant
or to dry up and die. Dormant plants tend to shrink to a smaller size and expose
soil, which can predispose the system to weed encroachment.

NOTE: There are no absolutes when it comes to irrigation. Check the plants for
wilting in the morning rather than midday. Irrigate thoroughly to runoff to
remoisten entire soil profile if the plants show signs of wilting in the morning.

In areas of reflected light, such as next to south facing walls, more frequent
irrigation should be applied to keep the soil from becoming excessively dry.

D. Inspections and Plant Care Protocol

Conduct the following EVERY 2 WEEKS (twice per month) During the entire Spring
through Fall Growing Season

1. Conduct hand weeding during the twice monthly inspection. Pull all weeds, never
allow any weed to flower, set seed and complete its life cycle. Weeding should be
conducted spring through fall in areas where the roof becomes frozen and snow-
covered in winter. In warmer climates, it should be continued year round.

The interval may be adjusted in accord with seasonal variations in weed growth,
but the interval should never exceed 2 weeks or be long enough to allow for
weeds to flower and set seed. Never allow woody plants to establish in a green
roof system as their root systems are extensive and can damage roof membranes.

Herbicides, whether pre-emergent or post-emergent, are not recommended as they

are not healthy for the environment and can contaminate runoff. A need for pre-
emergent herbicides is a sign of weeding too infrequently.
2. Displaced Soil
Any displaced soil, typically due to nesting birds, should be immediately
replaced.
3. Drainage Inspection
Roof drains should be cleared of any debris, pebbles, leaves, etc. during the twice
monthly inspection to keep drains flowing freely.
4. Debris / Trash Removal
Remove immediately debris or trash during twice monthly inspection. Especially
during fall and spring, rake green roof planting clean of any matted tree leaves to
prevent smothering.

329500-9
 5. Pesticides
Pesticide use is discouraged and should always be considered secondary to
cultural and biological control measures, as pesticides can get into runoff water
and cause environmental damage. Pesticide use should only be conducted by
qualified and licensed applicators, and on an “as needed” basis. All applications
of pesticides are the sole responsibility of the applicator.
6. Optional Mowing
If desired, around April 1, mow the green roof to a height of 2” or less. DO NOT
mow the green roof when the plants are flowering. The clippings should stay on
the roof. Do not bag and remove. USE PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT.
7. Wintertime
Avoid applying salt and other deicing agents to green roof plantings. Avoid
walking on frozen plants and roof surfaces.
E. Apply slow release fertilizer as needed in accord with manufacturer’s directions. DO
NOT fertilize within two months of the first frost. In northern temperate climates, this is
approximately August 15. Avoid runoff into sensitive areas.

3.8 ACCEPTANCE

A. Conduct post installation inspection to determine acceptance of modules. Inspection to be

made by General Contractor’s Representative or by Owner’s Representative upon
General Contractor’s request; five working days notice required.
B. Installer is responsible to ensure proper module/plant maintenance until work has been
accepted by representative of Owner or General Contractor.
C. Upon acceptance, Owner assumes responsibility for module/plant maintenance.

3.9 CLEAN UP

A. Throughout installation, keep all work surfaces clean and free of grit, dirt, or debris. Use
broom not blower, do not sweep soil under modules or slip sheet. Do not place modules
upon soil, dirt, stones or grit. Following installation, remove all excess materials and
tools from job site. Ensure that any damage that occurs as a result of installation is
appropriately and immediately repaired.

329500-10
SECTION 329501 ALTERNATE #1 – CONVENTIONAL GREEN ROOF

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A This section includes an assembly of components that protect the roof waterproofing
membrane and provide drainage, thermal and ultra-violet protection.
B This section includes materials, which are compatible with the roofing membrane
system, including but not limited to, drainage layer, filter fabric, substrate media and
vegetation to install and maintain a complete perennial groundcover system
1. Water tests and roofing membrane inspection, to insure membrane integrity and
the issuance of the roofing warranty is required prior the beginning of the work
indicated in this section.
1. 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install green roofing materials that will allow for drainage, withstand wind
loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather.
1. Design green roofing system to within structural limits required for roof loads.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of green roofing product specified. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of the following:
1. Plan layouts of all green roofing areas showing the pattern and spacing of the
seams, particularly in the major roofing areas.
2. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

329501-1
 3. Cross-section of components, including- areas of significant slope.
4. Expansion joint assemblies, penetrations, curbs, and roof structures
C Samples for verification of the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch square of root resistant membrane.
2 12-by-12-inch square of drainage/filter layers.
3. 5 quarts of substrate per 50 cubic yards for quality standard analysis by NC State lab.
D Installer Certificates: Signed by green roofing system manufacturer certifying that
Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified green
roofing system.
E Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by green roofing manufacturer certifying that the
green roofing system complies with requirements specified in the "Performance
Requirements". Upon request, submit evidence of meeting requirements.
F Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of
green roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product
compositions.
G Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of green roofing system's compliance with building
code in effect for Project, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Warranties:
1. Green Roofing Manufacturer: Sample copy of standard green roofing system
manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of
warranty.
2_ Green Roofing Contractor's Warranty: Sample copy of standard green roofing
system manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and
exclusions of warranty.
1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section

who has knowledge of installing green roofing systems and landscaping systems similar to
that required for this Project and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the green roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product.

329501-2
 B Roofing Conference: Before starting green roofing construction, conduct conference at
Project site. Meet with the Owner and Manufacturer to review status of submittals and
coordination of work related to roof construction. Notify participants at least 5 working days
before conference.
1. Meet with, Owner; Owner's insurer, if applicable; testing and inspecting agency
representative; green roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's
representative; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects green roofing, including
installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to green roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
4. Review loading limitations of deck before, during and after green roofing.
5. Review acceptable methods of attaching layers of green roofing components to roofing
membrane substrate to satisfy the performance requirements.
6. Review flashings, special green roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect green roofing.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for green roofing system during and after
installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's original
containers, dry and undamaged.
B. Do not leave unused goods on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless
protected from weather and other moisture sources.
C. It is the responsibility of the contractor to secure all material and equipment on the job site. If
any material is stored on the roof, the contractor must make sure that the integrity of the deck is
not compromised at any time. Damage to the deck caused by the contractor will be sole
responsibility of the contractor and will be repaired or replaced at his expense.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not expose Materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
installed during same day.
B. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit
unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty
requirements.

329501-3
 C. Green Roofing Contractor's Warranty: The Contractor shall supply the owner with a
minimum one-year workmanship warranty. It is the responsibility of the green roofing
contractor to ensure that the plant life is healthy and thriving, the irrigation system is
working properly and all green roofing components are properly functioning for a period of
one year. The contractor's warranty shall not limit the contractor's obligation with respect to
State or Government laws or statutes.
1.8 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
A. The green roofing contractor will provide all green roofing maintenance necessary to
provide for a healthy green roof system for a period of one year. This shall include but is
not limited to periodic weeding as required, adjustments with the irrigation system, replacing
plants that die, etc.
B. Routine maintenance is essential to the success of the green roof systems and will have a direct
affect on the serviceability of the roofing waterproofing system. It is highly recommended
that after the first year mandatory maintenance program is completed, the owner continue a
similar maintenance program to ensure the long term success of the roofing and green roofing
system. Failure to maintain adequate maintenance may lead to termination of the waterproofing
warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL

A When a particular trade name or performance standard is specified it shall be indicative of a

standard required.
B. Any item or materials submitted, as an alternate to the manufacturer specified must
comply in all respects as to the quality and performance, including job site investigation of
the brand name specified. The Architect/ Owner shall be the sole judge as to whether or not
an item submitted as an equal is truly equal. Should the contractor choose to submit on the
equal basis, he shall assume all risk involved, monetary or otherwise, should the
Architect/Owner find it unacceptable.

2 .2 GREEN ROOFING MATERIAL

A. Root resistant barrier layer: (Required for all Garland GreenShield green roof systems)
A root-barrier layer, construction grade bitumen compatible, 12-mil thick high-density
polyethylene (HDPE) from (GSE World or equivalent) chaff be shingle-lapped (3 feet
overlap or shingle-lapped six inches and the lap covered with six-inch wide EDPM
composite blend tape or heat welded at the seams and installed immediately above the
completed and inspected waterproofing system.

329501-4
 B. Drainage and filtration layer (Synthetic): Structural engineered geotextile drainage fabric
with integrated filtration membrane, such as Garland's GreenShield Filterdrain 110. Selection of
drainage product will vary with roof pitch.
1. Type: Sandwich material, lightweight, strong and flexible with a felt filter fabric
laminated to the top surface. The drainage and filter layers provide drainage and protect
underlying roofing waterproofing membrane systems with a minimum thickness of 0.4
inches,
C. Substrate (plant growth media): Substrates, like the GreenShield Oasis 350 Series, is a
well-drained, soil-less mixture, professional custom blended of ingredients designed to sustain
plant growth for many years, and having a specified maximum saturated weight after an extended
period of heavy rains The soil depth will be 5.5 inches thick for this project. When the
GreenShield Oasis growing media is fully saturated, the weight will be a maximum of 27.63
lbs. per square foot (weight includes the specified Stressply EUV System). A certified report
of maximum structural load capacity by a Professional Structural Engineer is mandatory
before specifying the type and depth of substrate. This substrate is a mixture of coarse
aggregate mineral and organic components with the following specific characteristics:
1. Void ratio at container capacity (0.333 bar) > 15% (vol)
2. Moisture content at container capacity > 15% (vol)
3. Maximum water capacity > 45% (vol)
4. Density at maximum water capacity (see note) variable lb/cu ft
5. Saturated hydraulic conductivity >0.75in/hr and
< 8,0 in/hr
6. pH 5.5 to 6.5
7. Soluble salts (EC) <0.30mmhos/cm
(1:20 dilution)
8. Nutrient charge for initial root growth: Macro and micro nutrients incorporated in proportions
suitable for supporting the specified plants for 3 months or one growing season. Thorouglhly
blended at a batch facility by a custom blender. Moistened, as required, to prevent separation
during handling and to minimize excess dust during installation. Quality control samples to be
collected and submitted to Garland for testing prior to installation for each 50 cubic yards of
substrate prepared.
Note: Density at maximum water capacity is a variable that has to be calculated for each job
site based on many factors including structural design maximum weight load, soil depth,
types and sizes of plants and roof slope.
2.3 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Edging, penetration and plant separation details
1. Metal edging as Manufactured by Permaloc or equal
shall be installed at the perimeter of the entire roof and around such other roof projections
and penetrations as specified on project drawings.

329501-5
 2. The edging must not block water drainage from the roof. Drainage shall be continuous
to designated drains.
3. See drawings for rock ballast perimeter around each green roof area and around any
penetrations in the roof. Root resistant barrier shall extend beneath ballasted areas. Edge
elements made of metal will be used to separate ballasted areas from the plant growth
substrate. The edge elements must be 1.0 inch higher than the top of the growth substrate
layer.

B Plants: Plants will be low growing, drought, heat and sun tolerant perennial ground
covers (2 Plants/Square Foot) whose roots can grow in the designated substrate depth. None of
the plant species may be invasive, that is capable of escaping to surrounding ground and
spreading uncontrollably. A plant species list and plant locations on the various roof areas shall be
provided by the Landscape Installer and approved by the roofing manufacturer's Horticulture staff.
A sample list of possible plants for consideration is included at the end of this section. Note fhat
most areas of a roof are in full shade from shading of adjacent taller buildings but some areas may be in
partial sun. The shading will affect plant species choices.
C Aggregate: Existing ballast can be cleaned and reused or Pea gravel (2B) is to be used per
the detail drawings. Additionally, the average thickness of the pea gravel is to be at least 2+" to
cover the Supports and any other material in the gravel area.

329501-6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which green roofing will be applied,
with Green Roofing Contractor present, for compliance with requirements.
B. The roof deck construction must be structurally sound to provide support for roof deck, membrane
waterproofing and green roofing system
C. The roof deck shall be of a type accepted by the green roofing manufacturer as a substrate for
their product.
D. Verify that edging and penetration surround systems are in place and secured as required.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to
perform services in connection with installing modified bitumen sheet system.
B. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent liquid materials from
entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installations
of modified bituminous sheet roofing system work.
3.3 ROOF PROTECTION
A. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of roof deck for storage, walking surface, and equipment.
Where such access is absolutely required, the Contractor shall provide all necessary protection
and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Both plywood
and polyester felt protection should be provided for all roof areas that receive traffic during
construction.
B. Prior to and during application, all dirt, debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by
vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air and/or similar methods.
C. The Contractor shall follow all safety regulations as recommended by OSHA.
D. If any damage occurs to the underlying roofing membrane system and water is allowed to enter
the structure under the completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GREEN ROOFING
A. Coordinate the installation of the green roofing system with the installation of all
roof top accessories and equipment.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to green roofing
installation according to green roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. All roof
surfaces shall be smooth and free of standing water.
C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when
no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
D. Water Test (by roofing contractor): Prior to installation of root resistant layer conduct
water test of areas to receive Green Roofing per NRCA standards.

329501-7
 1. Roofing system manufacturer's representative shall be present during water test.
Provide 48-hour notice to Owner, and Roofing system manufacturer's
representative.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF GREEN ROOFING

A Install over entire approved roofing waterproofing system the root resistant membrane.
Lap membrane according to specifications 2.2A above.
B Roll out drainage and filter mat composite, felt side on top, over entire surface of root
resistant membrane and butt edges straight and firmly to allow for barrier free drainage.

C. Install metal edging at the perimeter of the entire roof and around such other
roof projections and penetrations as specified on project drawings. The edging shall be
placed on top of the edge of the drainage and filter mat.

D Install Substrate:
1. The substrate shall be of the type specified under materials. Finish substrate surface
shall be level for green roof areas exposed to view.
2. The substrate shall be dispensed on the roof in a manner and depth that will not
cause a sudden increase above the live load design weight on the roof structure. It is
necessary to place approximately 5.5” inches of the substrate media in the
designated area. Protection boards must be used to transport the substrate and
personnel must not place their feet on the substrate within the stabilization matrix at
any time.
3. If the plants are not ready for immediate installation, then the substrate must
be kept moist by covering it with a spunbonded row-cover fabric and not with
polyethylene or other nonbreathable fabric.
4. Just prior to plant installation, the substrate must be soaked thoroughly with water
using a sprinkler or hand sprayer. After soaking the substrate should be level with or
slightly above the top of the stabilization matrix. If the substrate is below the top of
the matrix, then more substrate must be added and again soaked thoroughly. This
process must be repeated until the top of the substrate is at the designated depth of
5.5”.

329501-8
 E. Install Plants: The plants shall be installed (2 plants/square foot) according to design
and descriptions supplied by the Landscape installer and approved by Horticulture staff of The Garland
Company (or approved equal).
1. The plant species mixture shall include species that will maintain a continuous ground cover over
the life of the roofing material.
2. The plants will be grown as specified under Materials.
3. The plants must be kept shaded, cool and moist at all times prior to planting. If the
plants arrive on pallets and are covered with shrinkwrap plastic. The shrinkwrap plastic must be
removed immediately so the plants are not overheated during further exposure & handling.
4. When the plants are moved to the roof area, in preparation for planting, they must
be transported and set in place as quickly as possible and kept watered during the staging and
installation process. If mats are used they must be carried by at least two people and handled
with care to avoid edge damage and substrate and plant loss. It may work best to transfer the mats
from the pallet to a carrying platform with rope handles for transporting to the planting site.
5. Firm the plants in place to make good contact with the underlying substrate.
6. Thoroughly wet the plants after they are installed.
F. Provide maintenance of all green roof surfacing materials, including substrate
stabilization layer and vegetation as described in other sections.
3.6 EDGING AND PENETRATION
A. Install continuous designated edging at the perimeter of the entire green roofing sections
and around roof projections and penetrations as specified on project drawings.
B. Thickness shall be as required to exceed height of green roofing materials, plant and substrate
stabilization layers by one inch.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange for green roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect green
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Owner.
1. Notify Owner seventy-two (72) hours in advance of inspection.

B. Provide final completion of green roofing in compliance with the specifications and
industry standards.
3.8 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. Prior to the completion of the work, it shall be inspected by the Owner. All defects, non-
compliance with the specifications, or other recommendations by the Manufacturer shall be
itemized in a punch list. These items must be corrected immediately by the Contractor
prior to completion of the work, to the satisfaction of the Owner and Manufacturer.
B. All warranties shall be submitted for acceptance prior to final payment.

329501-9
 DESIGN NOTES

I. DESIGN LIVE LOADS FOR NEW WORK

A. ROOF LIVE LOAD

1. Pg = 40 PSF
2. Pf = 28 PSF
3. Ce = 1.0
4. I = 1.0
5. Ct=1.0

B. SUPERIMPOSED ADDITIONAL ROOF DEAD LOADS

1. GREEN ROOF PALLETS = 35 PSF

C. WIND LOAD
1. BASIC WIND SPEED = 90 MPH
2. I = 1.00
3. EXPOSURE = B

THE STRUCTURE IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING

CODE/2006.

II. STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE ASTM A36, Fy=36 KSI, OR ASTM A992, Fy=50
KSI.

B. ALL HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM A325N.

C. WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE “STRUCTURAL

WELDING CODE” AWSD1.1-90. E70XX ELECTRODE.

D. CONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGN AND ERECT SHORING AND/OR BRACING OF

EXISTING WALLS AND FLOORS AS REQUIRED DURING INSTALLATION OF
MEMBERS. DESIGN AND ERECTION OF SHORING AND/OR BRACING SHALL BE
THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.

E. NO FABRICATION SHALL PROCEED PRIOR TO SHOP DRAWINGS APPROVAL.

F. NO OPENINGS IN BEAMS OR COLUMNS ARE PERMITTED WITHOUT ENGINEER’S

APPROVAL.

G. SPLICING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS WHERE NOT DETAILED ON THE

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IS PROHIBITED WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE
ENGINEER AS TO LOCATION, TYPE OF SPLICE AND CONNECTION TO BE MADE.

H. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE FINISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH

SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900.

I. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUPERVISED BY A

REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER AND SHALL INCLUDE DETAILS FOR
APPLICATION AND ASSEMBLY OF ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. INCLUDE
DETAILS OF CUTS, CONNECTIONS, HOLES, AND OTHER PERTINENT DATA.
INDICATE WELDS BY STANDARD AWS 2.1 SYMBOLS SHOWING SIZE, LENGTH

AND TYPE OF EACH WELD. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER
FOR APPROVAL.

J. ALL MISCELLANEOUS STEEL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE WELDED ALL AROUND

WITH ONE-QUARTER-INCH FILLET WELD UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, EXCEPT
FOR SLOTTED CONNECTIONS.

K. ALL STEEL BEAM CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SIMPLE SHEAR BEARING TYPE

CONNECTIONS CAPABLE OF CARRYING A LOAD EQUAL TO HALF THE MAXIMUM
BEAM AND SHEAR AS GIVEN IN AISC (NINTH EDITION) TABLE FOR “ALLOWABLE
UNIFORM LOADS IN KIPS FOR BEAMS LATERALLY SUPPORTED.”

L. BOLTS SHALL BE PLACED IN A SINGLE VERTICAL ROW.

M. CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROTECTION OF ALL FINISHED

SURFACES DURING INSTALLATION OF THE MEMBERS.

I. GENERAL

A. THE CONTRACTOR WILL MEASURE AND PROVIDE ALL DIMENSIONS,

ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
AND THE SUBMISSION OF SHOP DRAWINGS, AND WILL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER
IMMEDIATELY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES.

B. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING TEMPORARY

BRACING AND SHORING, AS REQUIRED, TO ENSURE VERTICAL AND LATERAL
STABILITY OF THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE OR PORTION THEREOF DURING
CONSTRUCTION.

C. DETAILS, SECTIONS, AND NOTES SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED

TO BE TYPICAL AND WILL APPLY TO SIMILAR CONDITIONS ELSEWHERE UNLESS
OTHERWISE SHOWN OR NOTED.

D. CONTRACTOR WILL NOT REPRODUCE ANY PORTION OF CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS IN THE SHOP DRAWINGS.

II. TESTING AND INSPECTION

THE OWNER SHALL RETAIN THE SERVICES OF AN INSPECTION AGENCY TO PERFORM

THE FOLLOWING SERVICES.

A. ALL WELDS ARE TO BE VISUALLY INSPECTED AND MEASURED.

B. WRITTEN REPORTS WILL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER STATING

COMPIANCE OR NONCOMPLIANCE WITH DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS. ALL REPORTS WILL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A
REGISTERED ENGINEER.